Programmable calculator

Abstract

An adaptable programmable calculator is provided by employing a modular read-write and read-only memory unit capable of being expanded to provide the calculator with additional program and data storage functions oriented towards the environment of the user, a central processing unit capable of performing both serial binary and parallel binary-coded-decimal arithmetic, and an input-output control unit capable of bidirectionally transferring information between the memory or central processing units and a number of input and output units. The memory, central processor, and input-output control units are controlled by a microprocessor included in the central processing unit.The input and output units include a keyboard input unit with a plurality of alphanumeric keys, a magnetic tape cassette reading and recording unit capable of bidirectionally transferring programs and data between a magnetic tape and the calculator and, a solid state output display unit capable of displaying every alphabetic and numeric character and many other symbols individually or in combination. All of these input and output units are included within the calculator itself. An output printer, an X-Y plotter, a typewriter, a teletypewriter, a magnetic or paper tape reading and recording unit, an extended read-write memory unit, a magnetic disc reading and recording unit, a modem for connecting the calculator via telephone lines to a remotely located computer, and many other peripheral input and output units may also be employed with the calculator.The calculator may be operated manually by the user from the keyboard input unit or automatically by a program stored within the memory unit to perform calculations and provide an output indication of the results thereof. It may also be employed to load programs into the memory unit from the keyboard input unit, to separately or collectively transfer data and programs bidirectionally between the memory unit and an external magnetic tape and to code programs or sections thereof stored in the memory unit as being secure when they are transferred to an external magnetic tape, thereby preventing users of the calculator from again transferring them to an external magnetic tape or obtaining any indication of the individual program steps once they are reloaded into the calculator. In addition, the calculator may be employed to edit programs stored in the memory unit and to print out program lists, labels, and messages.The calculator employs an extended version of BASIC computer language and allows the user to enter a line comprising an alphanumeric statement into the calculator from the keyboard input unit while visually observing an alphanumeric display of that line to check for errors therein, permitting the user to cause the entered lines to be immediately executed by the calculator or stored as part of a program within the memory unit, and permitting the user to subsequently recall the executed or stored line so that it may be reinspected, reevaluated, and, if necessary, edited and executed or re-executed, or restored in edited form. Any entered or recalled information may be edited by employing the keyboard input unit to selectively delete or replace incorrect or undesired portions of the information or to selectively insert corrected or previously omitted portions thereof on a line-by-line or character-by-character basis. Syntax errors are automatically detected by the calculator when the entered statement is terminated, and execution errors are automatically detected upon attempted execution of the statement or statements. Both types of errors are indicated to the user via error messages displayed by the output display unit. In the event the calculator is being used in combination with an external printer, unit indications of syntax or execution errors may, if desired, be printed.The calculator employs a compiler for converting each statement entered into the calculator in BASIC language into an internal stored format. It also employs an uncompiler for generating in the BASIC language statement any entered line converted to the internal stored format. The compiler and uncompiler operate on a line-by-line basis.The magnetic tape cassette reading and recording unit employed in the calculator allows the user to chain together several program segments and allows program manipulation of several blocks of data on an individual basis, thereby providing more efficient utilization of the available calculator memory. An interrupt feature of the cassette unit facilitates searching for a particular file located on a magnetic tape at the same time the calculator is performing other functions.

Description

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION

This invention relates generally to calculators and improvements therein and more particularly to programmable calculators that may be controlled both manually from the keyboard input unit and automatically by a stored program loaded into the calculator from the keyboard input unit or an external record member.

Computational problems may be solved manually, with the aid of a calculator (a dedicated computational keyboard-driven machine that may be either programmable or nonprogrammable), or a general purpose computer. Manual solution of computational problems is often very slow, so slow in many cases as to be an impractical, expensive, and ineffective use of the human resource, particularly when there are other alternatives for solution of the computational problems.

Nonprogrammable calculators may be employed to solve many relatively simple computational problems more efficiently than they could be solved by manual methods. However, the keyboard operations or language employed by these calculators is typically trivial in structure, thereby requiring many keyboard operations to solve more general arithmetic problems. Programmable calculators may be employed to solve many additional computational problems at rates hundreds of times faster than manual methods. However, the keyboard language employed by these calculators is also typically relatively simple in structure, thereby again requiring many keyboard operations to solve more general arithmetic problems.

Another basic problem with nearly all of the keyboard languages employed by conventional programmable and nonprogrammable calculators is that they allow the characteristics of the hardware of the calculator to show through to the user. Thus, the user must generally work with data movement at the hardware level, for example, by making sure that data is in certain storage registers before specifying the operations to be performed with that data and by performing other such housekeeping functions. In addition, these languages have been unique to a particular calculator and have not been generally familiar to those persons skilled in the computer and calculator arts.

In the past both programmable and nonprogrammable calculators have generally had very limited memories, thereby severely limiting the size of the computational problems they could be employed to solve. Because of these limitations, the relatively simple structure of the keyboard languages employed by these calculators and the housekeeping requirements associated with their languages have not heretofore been serious shortcomings. However, with advances in technology, the cost of memories has decreased to a point where larger memories could be economically included in programmable calculators. These larger memories have allowed larger and more sophisticated problems to be handled by programmable calculators. As a result the shortcomings of conventional calculator languages have become more critical, thereby creating the need for higher level keyboard languages.

In addition to the foregoing shortcomings, conventional programmable calculators generally have less capability and flexibility than is required to meet the needs of many users. For example, they typically cannot be readily expanded and adapted by the user to increase the amount of program and data storage memory or to perform many special keyboard functions oriented toward the environment of the user.

In some conventional programmable calculators a program stored within the calculator can be recorded onto an external magnetic record member and can later be reloaded back into the calculator from the magnetic record member. However, data and programs stored within these calculators typically cannot be separately recorded onto an external magnetic record member and later separately reloaded back into the calculator therefrom. Moreover, these calculators typically have no provision for making a program secure when it is recorded onto an external magnetic record member. Any user may therefore re-record the program or obtain an indication of the individual program steps once the program is reloaded into the calculator.

Conventional programmable calculators with self-contained output display units typically have little or no alpha capability and typically can only display the contents of one or more selected registers. They are therefore typically unable to display a line containing an alpha-numeric statement or an alphabetic message such as might be used, for example, to inform the user how to run programs with which he may be unfamiliar. Such features would be very helpful to the user both in editing programs and in simplifying their use.

Conventional programmable calculators typically have little or no capability for editing keyboard entries or programs stored within the calculator. For example, they typically have no provision for deleting, replacing, and inserting information included in or omitted from a keyboard entry or internally-stored program on a character-by-character or line-by-line basis. As another example, they typically have no provision for directly recalling any line of an internally-stored program. As a further example, they typically have no provision for automatically accommodating and sequencing program statements which are entered by the user in random order. Such features would be very helpful to the user in editing programs.

Conventional computers typically pose an interfacing problem between the user and the machine. This interface requirement takes the form of a machine-level operator with special abilities for maintaining the software system in operative condition for the user. Computer time sharing systems comprising a centrally located computer and a multiplicity of remotely located user terminals connected thereto by telephone lines have partially solved the user/machine interface problem. However, these systems lack the same flexibility as conventional computers in that they are only programmable and provide no convenient non-programmable method for performing relatively simple calculations. Both types of systems lack provision for editing a program statement from a keyboard without the necessity of retyping the entire statement.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

The principal object of this invention is to provide an improved programmable calculator that has more capability and flexibility than conventional programmable calculators, that is smaller, less expensive and more efficient in calculating elementary mathematical functions than conventional computer systems, and that is easier to utilize than conventional programmable calculators or computer systems.

Another object of this invention is to provide a programmable calculator employing BASIC computer language implemented in a read-only memory (ROM) that completely eliminates the user/machine interface requirement of conventional computers and further eliminates the necessity of learning a non-universal language such as those typically associated with conventional programmable calculators.

Another object of this invention is to provide a programmable calculator in which the user may, be employing a BACK key or a FORWARD key of a keyboard, position a visual cursor over any character position of a line of information entered from the keyboard or recalled into the display from memory to indicate the character which may be edited by simply actuating a key representing the replacement character.

Another object of this invention is to provide a programmable calculator in which the user may employ an INSERT key of a keyboard to insert a blank character position immediately to the left of the cursor position, and may insert any character therein by actuating its representative key.

Another object of this invention is to provide a programmable calculator in which the user may employ a space bar of a keyboard when entering a line of information from the keyboard to introduce blank characters at desired character positions along the line.

Another object of this invention is to provide a programmable calculator in which the user may delete a character from a line of information entered from the keyboard or recalled into the display from memory by actuating the space bar after positioning a cursor over the character to be deleted.

Another object of this invention is to provide a programmable calculator in which the user may delete a character from a line of information entered from the keyboard or recalled into the display from memory and simultaneously move the right hand portion of that line one character position to the left to occupy the space resulting from the deleted character by positioning the cursor over the character to be deleted and then simultaneously actuating the INSERT key and a SHIFT key.

Another object of this invention is to provide a programmable calculator in which the user may move a displayed line of information either left or right across a display register independently of the location of a cursor at a particular character position thereof.

Another object of this invention is to provide a programmable calculator in which the user may display a statement located at a particular line in memory by actuating a FETCH key of a keyboard followed by the line designation.

Another object of this invention is to provide a programmable calculator in which the user may halt execution of a program, call various lines of information from memory into a display register for visual examination, and thereafter automatically resume program execution at the point at which the halt occurred by actuating a single key of a keyboard unit.

Another object of this invention is to provide a programmable calculator in which the user may call a particular line of information from memory into a display register and may then actuate one of two keys of a keyboard unit to step to and visually observe the contents of lines preceding or following the line originally displayed.

Another object of this invention is to provide a programmable calculator in which the user may store into memory a line of information residing in a display register irrespective of the position of that line in the display register and irrespective of the location of a cursor.

Another object of this invention is to provide a programmable calculator in which the user may, by actuating a RECALL key of a keyboard unit, recall into a display register the most recent line of information which was terminated by either an EXECUTE or END-OF-LINE command.

Another object of this invention is to provide a programmable calculator in which a group of keys of a keyboard unit, representing various editing commands, are provided for conditioning the calculator to perform the command represented without the necessity of literally spelling out the command by actuating a sequence of alphabetic keys.

Another object of this invention is to provide a programmable calculator in which the user may, by actuating a single key of a keyboard unit, delete a statement portion of a line of information being entered into a display register while retaining the line number of that line.

Another object of this invention is to provide a programmable calculator in which the user may, by actuating a single key of a keyboard unit, erase from memory a line of information recalled into a display register from the memory.

Another object of this invention is to provide a programmable calculator in which the user may selectively list on an external printing unit an entire file stored in memory or any portion thereof.

Another object of this invention is to provide a programmable calculator in which the user may designate an automatic line numbering mode for automatically providing a line number, according to a selected sequence involving a starting line number and an increment, at the beginning of each line of information entered into a display register.

Another object of this invention is to provide a programmable calculator in which the user may selectively scratch from memory a mainline program, non-common variables, a symbol table, and the definitions of a group of user-definable keys.

Another object of this invention is to provide a programmable calculator in which the user may, during execution of a program, designate a trace mode of operation whereby the line number of each statement executed is printed on an external output unit as it is executed.

Another object of this invention is to provide a programmable calculator in which the user may, prior to execution of a program and without altering the program, designate a line or lines prior to the execution of which program execution is to be halted.

Another object of this invention is to provide a programmable calculator in which the user may selectively commence execution of a program at either the beginning or at any intermediate line and may designate that at such time all variables are to be either unaltered or set to an undefined state.

Another object of this invention is to provide a programmable calculator in which the user may, by actuating a single key of a keyboard unit, instruct the calculator to set all program variables to an undefined state and to set up array storage for all arrays previously dimensioned in a program.

Another object of this invention is to provide a programmable calculator in which the user may designate any portion of a program as being secure so that a user may not obtain any indication of the contents of such portion and may not store onto a magnetic record member any secure program that has previously been entered into the calculator from a magnetic record member but may observe the contents of the unsecure portion of any program residing in memory.

Another object of this invention is to provide a programmable calculator in which a group of characters may be associated with each one of a plurality of definable keys of a keyboard unit, may later be displayed upon actuation of the associated key, and, if the group of characters represents an executable command, may be immediately executed upon actuation of the associated key.

Another object of this invention is to provide a programmable calculator in which each of a plurality of definable keys of a keyboard unit may be associated with a single or multiline function of one argument, which function may be employed as part of a program or immediately executed from the keyboard.

Another object of this inventon is to provide a programmable calculator in which each of a plurality of definable keys of a keyboard unit may be associated with a multiplicity of BASIC language program statements and the resulting program executed upon actuation of the associated key.

Another object of this invention is to provide a programmable calculator in which the user may, when employing a matrix plug-in read-only memory module, select as a function the determinant of a previously defined square matrix.

Another object of this invention is to provide a programmable calculator in which the user may, by actuating a SHIFT key of a keyboard unit, selectively cause to be printed on an external printing unit either lower or upper case alphabetic characters.

Another object of this invention is to provide a programmable calculator in which the user may, when the calculator is used in conjunction with an external printing unit, designate a print-all mode for printing all lines of information entered from a keyboard and terminated by EXECUTE or END-OF-LINE commands, all error messages, and all information displayed during execution.

Another object of this invention is to provide a programmable calculator in which the user may immediately execute any self-contained BASIC language program statement from a keyboard unit.

Another object of this invention is to provide a programmable calculator in which plug-in read-only memory modules are not uniquely associated with a particular group of keys of a keyboard unit.

Another object of this invention is to provide a programmable calculator in which functions available through the use of plug-in read-only memory modules are selected by actuating a series of alphanumeric keys of a keyboard unit rather than a single key, thereby allowing the number of functions available to be independent of the number of keys available.

Another object of this invention is to provide a programmable calculator in which the user may create a program using functions available from a plurality of plug-in read-only memory modules inserted into receptacles on the calculator in a particular sequence, may record such program onto an external magnetic record member, and may thereafter execute such program on another calculator of the same type configured with the same plug-in read-only memory modules but without observing the sequence in which they were placed in the receptacles of the first calculator.

Another object of this invention is to provide a programmable calculator in which the user may, when the calculator is configured with a plotter plug-in read-only memory module and an external X-Y plotter, specify an offset of X and Y coordinates to be applied to all subsequent coordinate specifications.

Another object of this invention is to provide a programmable calculator in which the user may, when the calculator is configured with a plotter plug-in read-only memory module, and an external X-Y plotter, incrementally plot, in user units, points relative to a current pen position.

Another object of this invention is to provide a programmable calculator in which the user may, when the calculator is configured with a plotter plug-in read-only memory module and external X-Y plotter, plot rectangular coordinate axes by specifying in user units starting and ending coordinates for each axis, a coordinate at which each axis intersects the other axis, and a tick mark spacing for tick marking along each axis in either direction from a starting point.

Another object of this invention is to provide a programmable calculator in which the user may, when the calculator is configured with a plotter plug-in read-only memory module and an external X-Y plotter, plot labels according to the format of a standard BASIC language print statement or according to a referenced format statement of a program, specify the height of characters contained in such labels, specify a character aspect ratio (ratio of height to width) for the characters contained in such labels, specify an angle of rotation in either degrees, radians or grads at which such labels are to be plotted, and specify a paper height-to-width ratio for assuring character uniformity regardless of plot angle.

Another object of this invention is to provide a programmable calculator in which the user may, when the calculator is configured with a plotter plug-in read-only memory module and an external X-Y plotter, incrementally plot characters according to character size units for facilitating pen placement at the beginning of plotter labelling operations.

Another object of this invention is to provide a programmable calculator in which the user may, when the calculator is configured with a plotter plug-in read-only memory module and an external X-Y plotter, plot characters as the corresponding keys of a keyboard input unit are actuated and use UP, DOWN, LEFT, and RIGHT ARROW keys of the keyboard input unit for controlling the position of the plotter pen.

Another object of this invention is to provide a programmable calculator in which the user may, when the calculator is configured with a terminal plug-in read-only memory module and an external modem for transmitting and receiving information over telephone lines, select from a keyboard unit any baud rate from a continuously variable range of baud rates.

Another object of this invention is to provide a programmable calculator in which the user may, when the calculator is configured with a terminal plug-in read-only memory module and an external modem for transmitting and receiving data over telephone lines, select by actuating a single key of a keyboard unit either odd or even parity of transmitted data.

Another object of this invention is to provide a programmable calculator in which the user may when the calculator is configured with a terminal plug-in read-only memory module, enter free text information from a keyboard input unit, an external magnetic record member, or any peripheral input unit, edit such information on a line-by-line or character-by-character basis, store such information on an external magnetic record member, and thereafter transmit such information, for example, to a remotely located time-sharing computer system.

Another object of this invention is to provide a programmable calculator in which the user may, when the calculator is configured with a terminal plug-in read-only memory module, generate and transmit any ASCII codes.

Another object of this invention is to provide a programmable calculator in which the user may, when the calculator is configured with a terminal plug-in read-only memory module and an external modem for transmitting and receiving information over telephone lines, make calculations and run programs locally at the same time as, for example, the calculator is on-line with and running programs through a remotely located time-sharing computer system.

Another object of this invention is to provide a programmable calculator in which the user may, when the calculator is configured with a terminal plug-in read-only memory module, receive BASIC language programs from remote locations and thereafter run them locally on the calculator.

Another object of this invention is to provide a programmable calculator in which the user may, when the calculator is configured with an extended input-output plug-in read-only memory module, from a keyboard unit or under program control, generate and transmit to any of a plurality of input-output channels any twelve-bit code.

Another object of this invention is to provide a programmable calculator in which the user may, when the calculator is configured with an extended input-output plug-in read-only memory module, from a keyboard unit or under program control, read an eight-bit character from a designated input-output channel.

Another object of this invention is to provide a programmable calculator in which the user may, when the calculator is configured with an extended input-output plug-in read-only memory module, from a keyboard unit or under program control, read the status of a designated external input-output unit.

Another object of this invention is to provide a programmable calculator in which the user may, when the calculator is configured with an extended input-output plug-in read-only memory module, from a keyboard unit or under program control, perform bit manipulation on sixteen-bit integer data according to the functions of ROTATE, AND, and OR.

Another object of this invention is to provide a programmable calculator in which the user may, when the calculator is configured with an extended input-output plug-in read-only memory module, from a keyboard unit or under program control, convert between various multi-bit data codes and the ASCII code of the calculator for allowing the calculator to communicate with peripheral units having operating codes other than ASCII.

Another object of this invention is to provide a programmable calculator in which the user may, when the calculator is configured with an extended input-output plug-in read-only memory module, from a keyboard unit or under program control, write into a string variable any information which may be transmitted to an output unit.

Another object of this invention is to provide a programmable calculator in which the user may, from a keyboard or under program control, by means of a single command which may involve parameters, mark a magnetic tape, stored either on an internal tape cassette or on one of a plurality of external tape cassettes, into a designated number of files each being of a designated length.

Another object of this invention is to provide a programmable calculator in which the user may designate that a particular file stored on a magnetic tape cassette is to be used for either program storage or data storage and in which he is subsequently prevented from attempting to access data from a file designated for program storage and vice versa.

Another object of this invention is to provide a programmable calculator in which the user may, from a keyboard or under program control, access a file stored on a magnetic tape cassette, by means of a single command indicating a file number, which file number may be the result of an arithmetic expression.

Another object of this invention is to provide a programmable calculator in which only complete files of a designated length may be marked on a magnetic tape, thus preventing the existence of a partially complete file near the end of a tape because of an insufficient amount of tape.

Another object of this invention is to provide a programmable calculator in which the user may, by means of a single command entered either from a keyboard or encountered under program control, list on an external printing unit certain information with respect to each file stored on a magnetic tape cassette, such information being the file number, the amount of information currently stored therein, the file type, the maximum file length, the starting and ending line numbers of a program stored therein, the number of words of common data storage associated with a program stored therein, and the form of data stored therein.

Another object of this invention is to provide a programmable calculator in which the user may, from a keyboard unit or under program control, chain one or more program segments stored on a magnetic tape cassette to a program residing in the calculator memory and may use the same variables in each segment without declaring common storage for the variables.

Another object of this invention is to provide a programmable calculator in which the user may, from a keyboard unit or under program control, insert a program or a program segment stored on a magnetic tape cassette at any line number of a program residing in the calculator memory.

Another object of this invention is to provide a programmable calculator in which the user may specify a line number in memory at which a program or a program segment loaded from a magnetic tape cassette is to begin and in which, if the resulting line numbers differ from those of the program or program segment as it resided on tape, references within such program or program segment are automatically modified to reflect the current line number sequence.

Another object of this invention is to provide a programmable calculator in which the user may, from a keyboard unit or under program control, selectively store any portion of a program residing in the calculator memory onto a magnetic tape cassette.

Another object of this invention is to provide a programmable calculator in which the user may, from a keyboard unit or under program control, store the definitions associated with all keys of a group of user-definable keys into a file on a magnetic tape cassette.

Another object of this invention is to provide a programmable calculator in which the user may, from a keyboard or under program control, load from a file on a magnetic tape cassette the definitions associated with all keys of a group of user-definable keys.

Another object of this invention is to provide a programmable calculator in which the user may, from a keyboard unit or under program control, load, store, merge, or chain programs or functions residing or to reside on a magnetic tape cassette and associated with or to be associated with any key of a group of user-definable keys.

Another object of this invention is to provide a programmable calculator in which the user may, from a keyboard unit or under program control, load into the calculator memory from a magnetic tape cassette or store onto a magnetic tape cassette from the calculator memory all common data defined in the program residing in the calculator memory without specifying individual variable names and by means of a single command.

Another object of this invention is to provide a programmable calculator in which the user may load prerecorded assembly language programs containing commands, statements, or functions which expand the capabilities of the calculator and which may be selected for execution by the user just as though the same commands, statements, or functions had been made available to the user by means of a plug-in read-only memory module.

Another object of this invention is to provide a programmable calculator in which the user may, from a keyboard unit or under program control, search a magnetic tape cassette in either forward or reverse directions for locating a particular file at the same time as the calculator is executing program statements or keyboard commands.

Other and incidental objects of this invention will become apparent from a reading of this specification and an inspection of the accompanying drawings.

These objects are accomplished according to the illustrated preferred embodiment of this invention by employing a keyboard input unit, a magnetic tape cassette reading and recording unit, a solid state output display unit, an optional external output printer unit, an input-output control unit, a memory unit, and a central processing unit to provide an adaptable programmable calculator having manual operating, automatic operating, program entering, magnetic tape reading, magnetic tape recording, and alphanumeric display and print modes. The keyboard input unit includes a group of data keys for entering numeric data into the calculator, a group of control keys for controlling the various modes and operations of the calculator and the format of the output display, a group of alphanumeric keys arranged as a typewriter keyboard for entering statements, and a group of user-definable keys. All of the data and alphanumeric keys and some of the control keys may also be employed for programming the calculator.

The magnetic tape cassette reading and recording unit includes a reading and recording head, a drive mechanism for driving a magnetic tape past the reading and recording head, and reading and recording drive circuits coupled to the reading and recording head for bidirectionally transferring information between the magnetic tape and the calculator as determined by keyboard commands or commands which are part of a stored program.

The input-output control unit includes a sixteen-bit universal shift register serving as an input-output register into which information may be transferred serially from the central processing unit or in parallel from the keyboard input and magnetic tape cassette reading and recording units and from which information may be transferred serially to the central processing unit or in parallel to the solid state output display, magnetic tape cassette reading and recording, and output printer units. It also includes control logic responsive to the central processing unit for controlling the transfer of information between these units. The input-output control unit may also be employed to perform the same functions between the central processing unit and peripheral units including, for example, an external printing unit, a digitizer, a marked card reader, an X-Y plotter, an external magnetic tape unit, a disc, a typewriter, and a modem. A plurality of peripheral units may be connected at the same time to the input-output control unit by simply plugging interface modules associated with the selected peripheral units into receptacles provided therefore in a rear panel of the calculator housing.

The memory unit includes a modular random-access read-write memory having a dedicated system area and a separate user area for storing program statements and/or data. The user portion of the read-write memory may be expanded without increasing the overall dimensions of the calculator by the addition of a program storage module. Additional read-write memory made vailable to the user is automaticlly accommodated by the calculator, and the user is automatically informed when the storage capacity of the read-write memory has been exceeded.

The memory unit also includes a modular read-only memory in which routines and subroutines of assembly language instructions for performing the various functions of the calculator are stored. These routines and subroutines of the read-only memory may be expanded and adapted by the user to perform additional functions oriented toward the specific needs of the user. This is accomplished by simply plugging additional read-only memory modules into receptacles provided therefore in a side panel of the calculator housing. Added read-only memory modules are automatically accommodated by the calculator and are accessed by the calculator through a series of mnemonic tables. These tables contain mnemonics which are additions to the calculator's programming language.

Plug-in read-only memory modules include, for example, a matrix module, a string variables module, a plotter module, an extended input-output module, and a terminal module. The matrix module makes available to the user standard BASIC language matrix functions plus an additional function which returns the determinant of a previously defined square matrix. The string variables module makes available to the user standard BASIC language string variables operations. The plotter module enables the user to conveniently plot and label on an external X-Y plotter. The extended input-output module allows the calculator to be used with a wide variety of peripheral input-output units. The terminal module facilitates interfacing the calculator with a modem for communicating, for example, with remotely located time-sharing computer systems. It further allows free text editing and storage.

The memory unit further includes a pair of recirculating sixteen-bit serial shift registers. One of these registers serves as a memory address register for serially receiving information from an arithmetic-logic unit included in the central processing unit, for parallel addressing any memory location designated by the received information back to the arithmetic-logic unit. The other of these registers serves as a memory access register for serially receiving information from the arithmetic-logic unit for writing information in parallel into any addressed memory location, for reading information in parallel from any addressed memory location, and for serially transferring information to the arithmetic-logic unit. It also serves as a four-bit parallel shift register for transferring four bits of binary-coded-decimal information in parallel to the arithmetic-logic unit.

The central processing unit includes four recirculating sixteen-bit serial shift registers, a four-bit serial shift register, the arithmetic-logic unit, a programmable clock, and a microprocessor. Two of these sixteen-bit serial shift registers serve as accumulator registers for serially receiving information from and serially transferring information to the arithmetic-logic unit. The accumulator register employed is designated by a control flip-flop. One of the accumulator registers also serves as a four-bit parallel shift register for receiving four bits of binary-coded-decimal information in parallel from and transferring four bits of such information in parallel to the arithmetic-logic unit. The two remaining sixteen-bit serial shift registers serve as a program counter register and a qualifier register, respectively. They are also employed for serially receiving information from and serially transferring information to the arithmetic-logic unit. The four-bit serial shift register serves as an extend register for serially receiving information from either the memory access register or the arithmetic-logic unit and for serially transferring information to the arithmetic-logic unit.

The arithmetic-logic unit is employed for performing one-bit serial binary arithmetic, four-bit parallel binary-coded-decimal arithmetic, and logic operations. It may also be controlled by the microprocessor to perform bidirectional direct and indirect arithmetic between any of a plurality of the working registers and any of the registers of the read-write memory.

The programmable clock is employed to supply a variable number of shift clock pulses to the arithmetic-logic unit and to the serial shift registers of the input-output, memory, and central processing units. It is also employed to supply clock control signals to the input-output control logic and to the microprocessor.

The microprocessor includes a read-only memory in which a plurlaity of microinstructions and plurality are stored. These microinstructions and codes are employed to perform the basic instructions of the calculator. They include a plurality of coded and non-coded microinstructions for transferring control to the input-output control logic, for controlling the addressing and accessing of the memory unit, and for controlling the operation of the two accumulator registers, the program counter register, the extend register and the arithmetic-logic unit. They also include a plurality of clock codes for controlling the operation of the programmable clock, a plurality of qualifier selection codes for selecting qualifiers and serving as primary address codes for addressing the read-only memory of the microprocessor, and a plurality of secondary address codes for addressing the read-only memory of the microprocessor. In response to a control signal from a power supply provided for the calculator, control signals for the programmable clock, and qualifier control signals from the central processing and input-output control units, the microprocessor issues the microinstructions and codes stored in the read-only memory of the microprocessor as required to process either binary or binary-coded-decimal information entered into or stored in the calculator.

In the keyboard mode, the calculator is controlled by keycodes sequentially entered into the calculator from the keyboard input unit by the user. The solid state output display unit dispays either the alphanumeric representation of the keys as they are depressed or a numeric representation of output data or alphanumeric user instructions or program results. An external output printer unit may be controlled by the user to selectively print a numeric representation of any numeric data entered into the calculator from the keyboard input unit, a numeric representation of any result calculated by the calculator, or a program listing on a line-by-line basis of the statements entered.

When the calculator is in the keyboard mode, it may also be operated in a print-all printing mode. The output printer unit then prints out each program line as it is entered by the user.

In the program running mode, the calculator is controlled by automatically obtaining an internal representation of the program statements stored in the user storage section of the read-write memory. During automatic operation of the calculator, data may be obtained from the memory unit as designated by the program, from the keyboard input unit while the operation of the calculator is stopped for data either by the program or by the user, of from the magnetic tape cassette unit as designated by the program.

When the calculator is in the program running mode, the user may also selectively employ a trace mode to check the execution of the program line-by-line in order to determine whether the program, as entered into the calculator, does in fact carry out the desired sequence of statements.

In the program entering mode, statements are sequentially entered by the user into the calculator from the keyboard input unit and are translated into an internal stored format which consists of a series of operation codes and operand names and are thereafter stored as statements of a program in the user storage section of the readwrite memory.

The magnetic tape cassette reading and recording unit may be employed by the user to separately load either data, BASIC language programs, assembly language programs, or sets of user-definable key definitions into the calculator from an external magnetic tape cassette.

The magnetic tape cassette reading and recording unit may also be employed by the user to separately record either data, BASIC language programs, or sets of user-definable key definitions stored in the user section of the read-write memory onto an external magnetic tape cassette. Programs, or portions thereof, may be coded by the user as being secure when they are recorded onto an external magnetic tape cassette. The calculator detects such programs when they are reloaded into the calculator and prevents the user from re-recording them or obtaining any listing or other indication of the individual program steps contained in the secured portions of such programs.

DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

FIG. 1 is a front perspective view of an adaptable programmable calculator according to the preferred embodiment of this invention.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the adaptable programmable calculator of FIG. 1.

FIGS. 3A-B are a simplified block diagram of the adaptable programmable calculator of FIGS. 1 and 2.

FIGS. 4A-F are a memory map of the memory unit employed in the adaptable programmable calculator of FIGS. 1-3.

FIG. 4' is a diagram showing the arrangement of FIGS. 4A-F.

FIGS. 5A-B are a detailed memory map of the system read-write section of memory as shown in FIG. 4A.

FIG. 5' is a diagram showing the arrangement of FIGS. 5A-B.

FIG. 6 is a detailed memory map of the user read/write section of memory as shown in FIG. 4F.

FIG. 7 is a simplified operational logic flow chart illustrating the operation of the microprocessor employed in the central processing unit of FIGS. 3A-B.

FIG 8 is a plan view of the keyboard input unit employed in the adaptable programmable calculator of FIGS. 1-3.

FIG. 9 is an overall firmware block diagram for the adaptable programmable calculator.

FIGS. 10A-C are flow charts of floating point add and subtract routines selectable by the execution monitor of FIG. 9.

FIG. 11 is a flow chart of a floating point multiply routine selectable by the execution monitor of FIG. 9.

FIGS. 12A-B are a flow chart of a floating point divide routine selectable by the execution monitor of FIG. 9.

FIGS. 13A-C are a flow chart of a floating point square root routine selectable by the execution monitor of FIG. 9.

FIG. 14 is a flow chart of a store routine selectable by the execution monitor of FIG. 9.

FIG. 15 is a flow chart of a rounding routine employed in connection with several of the routines selectable by the execution monitor of FIG. 9.

FIGS. 16A-B are a flow chart of a tangent X routine selectable by the execution monitor of FIG. 9.

FIGS. 17A-B are a flow chart of an arctangent X routine selectable by the execution monitor of FIG. 9.

FIGS. 18A-B are a flow chart of an e.sup.X routine selectable by the execution monitor of FIG. 9.

FIG. 19 is a flow chart of a natural logarithm X routine selectable by the execution monitor of FIG. 9.

FIG. 20 is a flow chart of a subroutine employed by the tangent X and e.sup.X routines of FIGS. 16A-B and 18A-B, respectively.

FIGS. 21A-B are a flow chart of a subroutine employed by the tangent X and arctangent X routines of FIGS. 16A-B and 17A-B, respectively.

FIGS. 22A-B are a flow chart of a subroutine employed by the e.sup.X and natural logarithm X routines of FIGS. 18A-B and 19, respectively.

FIG. 23 is a flow chart of a subroutine employed by the arctangent X and natural logarithm X routines of FIGS. 18A-B and 19, respectively.

FIG. 24 is a flow chart of sine and cosine routines selectable by the execution monitor of FIG. 9.

FIG. 25 is a flow chart of an X.sup.Y power routine selectable by the execution monitor of FIG. 9.

FIG. 26 is a flow chart of a logarithm to the base ten routine selectable by the execution monitor of FIG. 9.

FIG. 27 is a block diagram of the microprocessor of FIGS. 3A-B.

FIGS. 28A-D are a detailed schematic diagram of the microprocessor of FIGS. 3A-B and 27.

FIG. 28' is a diagram showing the arrangement of FIGS. 28A-D.

FIGS. 29A-H are detailed flow charts illustrating the operation of the microprocessor of FIGS. 3A-B, 27, and 28A-D.

FIGS. 29' and 29" are diagrams showing the arrangement of FIGS. 29A-H.

FIG. 30 is a block diagram of the programmable clock of FIGS. 3A-B.

FIGS. 31A-C are a detailed schematic diagram of the programmable clock of FIGS. 3A-B and 30 and of a portion of the input-output control unit of FIGS. 3A-B.

FIG. 31' is a diagram showing the arrangement of FIGS. 31A-C.

FIG. 32 is a waveform diagram illustrating the operation of the programmable clock of FIGS. 3A-B, 30, and 31A-C.

FIGS. 33A-D are a detailed schematic diagram of the shift register and arithmetic logic units of FIGS. 3A-B.

FIG. 33' is a diagram showing the arrangement of FIGS. 33A-D.

FIG. 34 is a block diagram of the arithmetic logic unit of FIGS. 3A-B.

FIG. 35 is a block diagram of the memory unit of FIGS. 3A-B.

FIGS. 36A-B are a schematic diagram of the read-write memory of FIGS. 3A-B, 4A-F, and 35.

FIG. 36' is a diagram showing the arrangement of FIGS. 36A-B.

FIGS. 37A-B are a schematic diagram of the optional add-on read-write memory of FIGS. 3A-B, 4A-F, and 35.

FIG. 37' is a diagram showing the arrangement of FIGS. 37A-B.

FIG. 38 is a schematic diagram of the basic read-only memory of FIGS. 3A-B, 4A-F, and 35.

FIG. 39 is a sehematic diagram of the optional add-on read-only memory modules of FIG. 35 that may be plugged into the calculator to increase the number of functions available to the user.

FIG. 40 is a detailed schematic diagram of the buffer circuitry associated with the read-only memory modules of FIG. 39.

FIG. 41 is a block diagram of one of the read-only memory chips of FIGS. 38 and 39.

FIGS. 42A-D are a schematic diagram of one of the read-only memory chips of FIGS. 38 and 39.

FIG. 42' is a diagram showing the arrangement of FIGS. 42A-D.

FIG. 43 is a memory map of the memory unit of FIGS. 3A-B and 4A-F illustrating how it is partitioned into the read-only and read-write memory chips of FIGS. 36A-B through 42A-D.

FIG. 44 is a flow chart illustrating how the row members of the lists stored in the read-only memory chips are computed.

FIG. 45 is a table of bit numbers and actual bits used in connection with the flow chart of FIG. 44.

FIGS. 46A-B are a detailed schematic diagram of the memory address register of FIGS. 3A-B and 35 with its associated control circuitry.

FIG. 46' is a diagram showing the arrangement of FIGS. 46A-B.

FIGS. 47A-B are a waveform diagram and state sequence charts illustrating the operation of the control circuitry of FIGS. 46A-B.

FIG. 47' is a diagram showing the arrangement of FIGS. 47A-B.

FIGS. 48A-B are a detailed schematic diagram of the memory access register of FIGS. 3A-B and 35.

FIG. 48' is a diagram showing the arrangement of FIGS. 48A-B.

FIGS. 49A-D are a detailed schematic diagram of the input-output register and gating control circuits employed in the input-output control unit of FIGS. 3A-B.

FIG. 49' is a diagram showing the arrangement of FIGS. 49A-D.

FIG. 50 is a schematic diagram of the source and relationship of the input-output party lines connected to the peripheral interface module receiving receptacles of FIG. 20.

FIG. 51 is a waveform diagram illustrating the operation of the control section of the input-output control unit of FIGS. 3A-B and 32.

FIG. 52 is a flow chart illustrating the operation of the control section of the input-output control unit of FIGS. 3A-B and 31A-C.

FIG. 53 is a diagram showing how a one-of-ten decoder is employed to address peripheral input-output units to the calculator through the input-output control unit of FIGS. 3A-B.

FIG. 54 is a waveform diagram of some of the input signals employed by the input-output control unit and associated interface modules of FIGS. 3A-B.

FIG. 55 is a waveform diagram of some of the output signals employed by the input-output control until and associated interface modules of FIGS. 3A-B.

FIG. 56 is a waveform diagram of some of the high speed input signals employed by the input-output control unit and associated interface modules of FIGS. 3A-B.

FIG. 57 is a waveform diagram of some of the high speed output signals employed by the input-output control unit and associated interface modules of FIGS. 3A-B.

FIG. 58 is a waveform diagram illustrating the operation of the interrupt mode of operation of the input-output control unit of FIGS. 3A-B.

FIG. 59 is a schematic diagram of logic that may be used to interface an X-Y plotter to the input-output control unit of FIGS. 3A-B.

FIG. 60 is a schematic diagram of logic that may be used to interface a printing unit to the input-output control print of FIGS. 3A-B.

FIG. 61 is a schematic diagram of logic that may be used to interface a modem to the input-output control unit of FIGS. 3A-B.

FIG. 62 is a schematic diagram of logic that may be used to transfer any eight-bit code into or out of the input-output control unit of FIGS. 3A-B.

FIG. 63 is a detailed schematic diagram of the keyboard input unit employed in the adaptable programmable calculator of FIGS. 1-3B.

FIG. 64 is a block diagram of the magnetic tape cassette reading and recording unit employed in the calculator of FIGS. 1--3B.

FIG. 65 is a detailed schematic diagram of the interface block of FIG. 64.

FIGS. 66A-B are a detailed schematic diagram of the control logic block of FIG. 64.

FIG. 66' is a diagram showing the arrangement of FIGS. 66A-B.

FIGS. 67A-B are a detailed schematic diagram of the read-write block of FIG. 64.

FIG. 67' is a diagram showing the arrangement of FIGS. 67A-B.

FIGS. 68A-B are a detailed schematic diagram of the motor control block of FIG. 64.

FIG. 68' is a diagram showing the arrangement of FIGS. 68A-B.

FIG. 69 is a detailed schematic diagram of the interconnect block of FIG. 64.

FIG. 70 is a detailed schematic diagram of the head driver and preamp blocks of FIG. 64.

FIG. 71 is a block diagram illustrating how the magnetic tape cassette reading and recording unit of FIGS. 64-70 interacts with the calculator of FIGS. 1-3B.

FIGS. 72A-B are a detailed schematic diagram of the output display unit employed in the adaptable programmable calculator of FIGS. 1-3B. FIG. 72' is a diagram showing the arrangement of FIGS. 72A-B.

FIGS. 73A-B are a detailed schematic diagram of the control logic circuit associated with the output display unit of FIGS. 72A-B.

FIG. 73' is a diagram showing the arrangement of FIGS. 73A-B.

FIG. 74 is a block diagram of the power supply system employed in the adaptable programmable calculator of FIGS. 1-3B.

FIGS. 75A-B are a detailed schematic diagram of the power supply system of FIG. 74.

FIG. 75' is a diagram showing the arrangement of FIGS. 75A-B.

FIGS. 76A-B are a block diagram of an interface module that may be employed to interface a typewriter to the adaptable programmable calculator of FIG. 1-B.

FIG. 76' is a diagram showing the arrangement of FIGS. 76A-B.

FIG. 77A-B are a flow chart of an input-output routine performed when a typewriter is employed with the programmable calculator of FIGS. 1-3B.

FIG. 77' is a diagram showing the arrangement of FIGS. 77A-B.

FIGS. 78A-D are a detailed schematic diagram of the control logic block of FIGS. 76A-B.

FIG. 78' is a diagram showing the arrangement of FIGS. 78A-D.

FIGS. 79A-B are a detailed schematic diagram of the power gates of FIGS. 76A-B.

FIG. 79' is a diagram showing the arrangement of FIGS. 79A-B.

FIGS. 80A-B are a simplified logic diagram showing state qualifiers and instructions relating to the flow chart of FIGS. 77A-B.

FIG. 81 is a detailed schematic diagram of the ROM, data latch, and compare circuitry of FIGS. 76A-B.

FIG. 82 is a detailed schematic diagram of a power supply that may be employed to power the typewriter interface circuitry of FIGS. 78A-D, 79A-B, and 81.

FIG. 83 is a flow chart of the turn-on routine which is a portion of the system monitor of FIG. 4B.

FIGS. 84A-D are a flow chart of a routine comprising another portion of the system monitor of FIG. 4B.

FIG. 85 is a flow chart of the system table scan routine of FIG. 4D.

FIG 86 is a flow chart of a subroutine called by the routine of FIG. 85.

FIG. 87 is a flow chart of the table search routine of FIG. 4A.

FIGS. 88A-G are a flow chart of the keyboard input routine and special keyboard functions routines of FIG. 4A.

FIGS. 89A-B are flow charts of subroutines called by the routines of FIGS. 88A- G.

FIG. 90 is a flow chart of the clear subroutine called by various ones of the routines of FIGS. 4A-F.

FIG. 91 is a flow chart of a subroutine called by the routine of FIG. 88F.

FIG. 92 is a flow chart of a subroutine called by the keyboard input routine of FIGS. 4A and 88A-G.

FIG. 93 is a flow chart of a keyboard driver subroutine called by the subroutine of FIG. 92.

FIGS. 94A-F are flow charts of some of the general system subroutines of FIG. 4A.

FIG. 95 is a flow chart of the error routine of FIG. 4B.

FIGS. 96A-D are flow charts of the program memory manager routines of FIG. 4B.

FIG. 97 is a flow chart of another of the general system subroutines of FIG. 4A which is also called by the routines of FIGS. 96A-D.

FIG. 98 is a flow chart of another of the general system subroutines of FIG. 4A.

FIGS. 99A-F are flow charts of the user-definable key routines of FIG. 4A.

FIGS. 100A-D are flow charts of the execution monitor and keyboard execution control blocks of FIG. 4C.

FIG. 101 is a flow chart of the load execution routine of FIG. 4D.

FIG. 102 is a flow chart of the store execution routine of FIG. 4D.

FIG. 103 is a flow chart of the merge execution routine of FIG. 4D.

FIG. 104 is a flow chart of the link execution routine of FIG. 4D.

FIG. 105 is a flow chart of the find execution routine of FIG. 4D.

FIGS. 106A-D are flow charts of subroutines called by the execution routines of FIGS. 101-104.

FIG. 107 is a flow chart of the load data execution routine of FIG. 4D.

FIG. 108 is a flow chart of the store data execution routine of FIG. 4D.

FIG. 109 is a flow chart of a subroutine called by the routines of FIGS. 107 and 108.

FIG. 110 is a flow chart of the load key execution routine of FIG. 4D.

FIG. 111 is a flow chart of the store key execution routine of FIG. 4D.

FIG. 112 is a flow chart of the load bin execution routine of FIG. 4D.

FIG. 113 is a flow chart of the mark execution routine of FIG. 4D.

FIG. 114 is a flow chart of a subroutine called by the routine of FIG. 113.

FIG. 115A is a flow chart of the list execution routine of FIG. 4D.

FIG. 115B is a flow chart of a subroutine called by the routine of FIG. 115A.

FIG. 116 is a flow chart of the secure routine of FIG. 4D.

FIGS. 117A-B are a flow chart of the interrupt routine of FIG. 4D.

FIGS. 118A-B are a flow chart of a routine for performing an OFFSET command selectable when the plotter plug-in read-only memory module is employed with the calculator.

FIG. 119 is a flow chart of a routine for performing an IPLOT command selectable when the plotter plug-in read-only memory module is employed with the calculator.

FIG. 120 is a flow chart of a routine for performing a LABEL command selectable when the plotter plug-in read-only memory module is employed with the calculator.

FIG. 121 is a flow chart of a routine for performing a LETTER command selectable when the plotter plug-in read-only memory module is employed with the calculator.

FIG. 122 is a flow chart of a routine for performing a CPLOT command selectable when the plotter plug-in read-only memory module is employed with the calculator.

FIG. 123 is a flow chart of a subroutine employed by the routine of FIG. 122.

FIG. 124 is a flow chart of a routine for performing XAXIS and YAXIS commands selectable when the plotter plug-in read-only memory module is employed with the calculator.

FIGS. 125A-C are flow charts of subroutines called by the routine of FIG. 124.

FIGS. 126A-C are flow charts of subroutines called by the routines of FIGS. 118-124.

FIG. 127 is a flow chart of a primary entry routine employed when the terminal read-only memory module is plugged into the calculator.

FIGS. 128A-W are a flow chart of a keyboard input and editing routine employed when the terminal read-only memory module is plugged into the calculator.

FIGS. 129A-B are a flow chart of a modem interrupt service routine employed when the terminal read-only memory module is plugged into the calculator.

FIG. 130 is a flow chart of a secondary entry routine employed when the terminal read-only memory module is plugged into the calculator.

FIG. 131 is a flow chart of an output statment routine employed when the extended input-output read-only memory module is plugged into the calculator.

FIGS. 132A-D are flow charts of subroutines called by the routine of FIG. 131.

FIG. 133 is a flow chart of a BIN command selectable when the extended input-output plug-in read-only memory module is employed with the calculator.

FIG. 134 is a flow chart of a CHAR command selectable when the extended input-output plug-in read-only memory module is employed with the calculator.

FIG. 135 is a flow chart of a STAT command selectable when the extended input-output plug-in read-only memory module is employed with the calculator.

FIG. 136 is a flow chart of binary ROTATE, AND, and OR commands selectable when the extended input-output plug-in read-only memory module is employed with the calculator.

DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENT

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Referring to FIGS. 1 and 2, there is shown an adaptable programmmable calculator 10 including both a keyboard input unit 12 for entering information into and controlling the operation of the calculator and the magnetic tape cassette reading and recording unit 14 for recording information stored within the calculator onto one or more external tape cassettes 16 and for subsequently loading the information recorded on these and other similar magnetic tape cassettes back into the calculator. The calculator also includes a solid state output display unit 18 for displaying alphameric information stored within the calculator. All of these input and output units are mounted within a single calculator housing 24 adjacent to a curved front panel 26 thereof.

As shown in FIG. 2, a plurality of peripheral input and output units including, for example, a line printer, a digitizer, a marked card reader, an X-Y plotter, a typewriter, a teletypewriter, an extended read-write memory unit, a magnetic disc reading and recording unit, and a modem for connecting the calculator via telephone lines to a remotely located computer, may be connected to the calculator at the same time by simply inserting interface modules 30 associated with the selected peripheral units into any of four receptacles 32 provided therefor in a rear panel 34 of the calculator housing. As each interface module 30 is inserted into one of these receptacles, a spring-loaded door 38 at the entrance of the receptacle swings down allowing passage of the interface module. Once the interface module is fully inserted, a printed-circuit terminal board 40 contained within the interface module plugs into a mating edge connector mounted inside the calculator. If any of the selected peripheral units require AC line power, their power cords may be plugged into either of two AC power outlets 42 provided therefor at the rear panel of calculator housing 24.

Referring to the simplified block diagram shown in FIGS. 3A-B, it may be seen that the calculator also includes an input-output control unit 44 (hereinafter referred to as the I/O control unit) for controlling the transfer of information to and from the input and output units, a memory unit 46 for storing and manipulating information entered into the calculator and for storing routines and subroutines of basic instructions performed by the calculator, and a central processing unit 48 (hereinafter referred to as the CPU) for controlling the execution of the routines and subroutines of basic instructions stored in the memory unit as required to process information entered into or stored within the calculator. The calculator also includes a bus system comprising an S-bus 50, a T-bus 52, and an R-bus 54 for transferring information from the memory and I/O control units to the CPU, from the CPU to the memory and I/O control units, and between different portions of the CPU. It further comprises a power supply for supplying DC power to the calculator and peripheral units employed therewith and for issuing a control signal POP when power is supplied to the calculator.

The I/O control unit 44 includes an input-output register 56 (hereinafter referred to as the I/O register), associated I/O gating control circuitry 58, and input-output control logic 60 (hereinafter referred to as the I/O control), I/O register 56 comprises a universal sixteen-bit shift register into which information may be transferred either bit-serially from CPU 48 via T-bus 52 or in parallel from keyboard input unit 12, magnetic tape cassette reading and recording unit 14, and peripheral input units 28 such as the marked card reader via twelve input party lines 62. Information may be transferred from I/O register 46 either bit-serially to CPU 48 via S-bus 50 or in parallel to magnetic tape cassette reading and recording unit 14, solid state output display unit 18, output printer unit 20, and peripheral output units 28 such as the X-Y plotter or the typewriter via sixteen output party lines 64.

I/O gating control circuitry 58 includes control circuits for controlling the transfer of information into and out of I/O register 56 in response to selected I/O qualifier control signals from CPU 48 and selected I/O control instructions from I/O control 60. It also includes an interrupt control circuit 65, a peripheral control circuit 66, a printer control circuit 68, and a display control circuit 69 for variously controlling the input and output units and issuing control signals QFG and EBT to I/O control 60 via two output lines 71 and 72. These last mentioned control circuits variously perfrom their control functions in response to control signal POP from the power supply, I/O qualifier control signals from CPU 48, I/O control instructions from I/O control 60, and control signals from keyboard input unit 12. Interrupt control circuit 65 initiates the transfer of information into I/O register 56 from keyboard input unit 12 or interrupting peripheral input units 28 such as the marked card reader and issues a qualifier control signal QNR to CPU 48 via output lines 73. Peripheral control circuit 66 enables interface modules 30 plugged into the calculator to respond to information from I/O register 56, control associated peripheral units 28, transfer information to and/or receive information from associated peripheral units 28, and in some cases intiate the transfer of information to I/O register 56 from the interface modules themselves. Printer control circuit 68 and display control circuit 69 enable output display unit 18, and output printer unit 20, respectively, to respond to information from I/O register 56.

When a basic I/O instruction obtained from memory unit 46 is to be executed, CPU 48 transfers control to I/O control 60 by issuing a pair of I/O microinstructions PTR and XTR thereto. In response to these I/O microinstructions from CPU 48, control signal POP from the power supply, control signals QFG and EBT from I/O gating control circuitry 58, and I/O qualifier and clock control signals from CPU 48, I/O control 60 selectively issues one or more I/O control instructions to gating control circuitry 58 as required to execute the basic I/O instructions designated by CPU 48 and issues control signals, TTX, XTR, QRD, and SCT to CPU 48 via output lines 74-77. The I/O qualifier control signals issued to I/O control 60 and gating control circuitry 58 by CPU 48 are derived from the basic I/O instruction to be executed. Those qualifier control signals issued to I/O control 60 designate the specific I/O control instructions to be issued by I/O control 60, while those issued to gating control circuitry 58 designate selected control circuits to be employed in executing the basic I/O instruction.

Memory unit 46 includes a modular random-access read-write memory 78 (hereinafter referred to as the RWM), a modular read-only memory 80 (hereinafter referred to as the ROM), a memory address register 82 (hereinafter referred to as the M-register), a memory access register 84 (hereinafter referred to as the T-register), and control circuitry 85 for these memories and registers. The RWM 78 and ROM 80 comprise MOS-type semiconductor memories. As shown in the memory map of FIGS. 4A-F the basic RWM 78 contains a dedicated system storage section of 256 sixteen-bit words extending from address 1400 to address 1777 and a separate user program and/or data storage section of 1792 sixteen-bit words extending from address 40400 to address 43777. All addresses on the memory map are represented in octal form.

An optional 2048 sixteen-bit words of RWM may be made available to the user at address 44000 to address 47777. This is accomplished by removing a top panel 90 of the calculator housing shown in FIG. 1, and inserting an additional printed circuit board containing the optional memory. The additional RWM is automatically accommodated by the calculator.

As shown in the more detailed memory map of FIGS. 5A-B, the RWM dedicated system storage section includes 52 words (addresses 1400-1463) containing information in the form of mnemonic variables which is employed by the firmware routines shown in FIG. 9. A more detailed description of these mnemonic variables is given on page 21 of the calculator basic system firmware listing located elsewhere in this specification. Addresses 1466-1477 and 1701-1737 are used as temporary storage by the various routines shown in FIG. 9. Addresses 1500-1550 comprise a 41-word buffer used to contain the input characters during syntax analysis. Addresses 1551-1621 comprise a 41-word buffer used by the single line display refresh routine of FIG. 9. These 41 words along with 42 additional words (addresses 1622-1673) are used as a syntax buffer during syntax analysis. Four of these words (addresses 1622-1625) are used as temporary registers by several of the statement execution routines of FIG. 9. Eight words (addresses 1630-1637) are used as two temporary floating point number registers by the formula evaluation routines of FIG. 9. Addresses 1640-1677 comprise 32 words which are used by the statement execution routines of FIG. 9. Eight words (addresses 1744-1747 and 1754-1757) are employed as AR1 and AR2 four-word working registers for performing binary-coded-decimal arithmetic. An additional eight words (addresses 1740-1743 and 1750-1753) are employed as working data registers X.sub.c and Y.sub.c for implementation of the trigonometric functions. These sixteen words (addresses 1740-1757) are used as temporary storage registers by all the routines of FIG. 9 except the statement execution and formula evaluation routines. A variable-length system subroutine stack (addresses 1760-1772) is employed for storing return addresses required by programs stored in ROM 80. Four words (addresses 1773-1776) are used to store the result of the latest keyboard computation. The last word in the system RWM (address 1777) is used to store a pointer indicating the next available location for the return address of the next subroutine call within the basic system. A complete assembly language description of the system RWM is included in pages 21-24 of the calculator basic system firmware listing.

As shown in the memory map of FIGS. 4A-F and the more detailed memory map of FIG. 6, user program and/or data storage section of RWM 78 contains 1760 words available to the user (as user addresses 40440-43777) for storing programs and/or data, 20 words dedicated for use by the interrupt routine of FIGS. 9 and 117A-B, and 12 words available for use by plug-in read-only memory modules. An additional 2048 sixteen-bit words may be available to the user (as user addresses 44000-47777).

Also, as shown in the memory map of FIGS. 4A-B, the basic ROM 80 contains 7680 sixteen-bit words extending from address 0000 to address 1377, form address 2000 to address 16777, and from address 40000 to address 40377. Routines and subroutines of basic instructions for performing the basic functions of the calculator and constants employed by thse routines and subroutines are stored in these portions of ROM 80. An additional 8192 sixteen-bit words of ROM may also be added at addresses 20000-37777 in steps of 512 and 1,024 words. This is accomplished by simply inserting plug-in ROM modules 92 into receptacles provided therefor within the calculator which are accessible through a door in the left panel of the calculator housing as illustrated in FIG. 1. As each plug-in ROM module 92 is inserted into one of these receptacles a printed circuit terminal board 96 contained within the plug-in ROM module plugs into a mating edge connector mounted inside the calculator. A handle pivotally mounted at the top end of each plug-in ROM module 92 facilitates removal of the plug-in ROM module once it has been fully inserted into one of the receptacles.

Routines and subroutines of basic instructions (and any needed constants) for enabling the calculator to perform many additional functions are stored in each plug-in ROM module 92. The user himself may therefore quickly and simply adapt the calculator to perform many additional functions oriented toward his specific needs by simply plugging ROM modules of his own choosing into the calculator. Added plug-in ROM modules are automatically accommodated by the calculator.

Referring again to FIGS. 3A-B, M-register 82 of the memory unit comprises a recirculating sixteen-bit serial shift register into which information may be transferred bit-serially from CPU 48 via T-bus 52 and out of which information may be transferred bit-serially to CPU 48 via S-bus 50. Information shifted into M-register 82 may be employed to address any word in RWM 78 or ROM 80 via fifteen output lines 106.

T-register 84 of the memory unit comprises a recirculating sixteen-bit serial shift register into which information may be transferred either bit-serially from CPU 48 via T-bus 52 or in parallel from any addressed word in RWM 78 and ROM 80 via sixteen parallel input lines 108. Information may be transferred from T-register 84 either bit-serially to CPU 48 via S-bus 50 or parallel to any addressed word in RWM 78 via sixteen parallel output lines 110. The four least significant bits of information contained in T-register 84 may comprise binary-coded-decimal information and may be transferred from the T-register in parallel to CPU 48 via three parallel output lines 112 taken with S-bus 50.

The control circuitry 85 of the memory unit controls these transfers of information into and out of M-register 82 and T-register 84, controls the addressing and accessing of RWM 78 and ROM 80, and refreshes RWM 78. It performs these functions in response to memory microinstructions, memory clock pulses, and shift clock pluses from CPU 48.

CPU 48 includes a register unit 114, an arithmetic-logic unit 116 (hereinafter referred to as the ALU), a programmable clock 118, and a microprocessor 120. Register unit 114 comprises four recirculating sixteen-bit shift registers 122, 124, 126, and 128 and one four-bit shift register 130. Shift registers 122 and 124 serve as sixteen-bit serial accumulator registers (hereinafter referred to as the A-register and the B-register, respectively) into which information may be transferred bit-serially from ALU 116 via T-bus 52 and out of which information may be transferred bit-serially to ALU 116 via R-bus 54. The four least significant bit positions of A-register 122 also serve as a four-bit parallel accumulator register into which four bits of binary-coded-decimal information may be transferred in parallel from ALU 116 via four parallel input lines 132 and out of which four bits of binary-coded-decimal information may also be transferred in parallel to ALU 116 via three parallel output lines 134 taken with R-bus 54.

Shift register 126 serves as a sixteen-bit system program counter (hereinafter referred to as the P-register) into which information may be transferred bit-serially from ALU 116 via T-bus 52 and out of which information may be transferred bit-serially to ALU 116 via R-bus 54. Information contained in the least significant bit position of P-register 126 may also be transferred as a qualifier control signal QPO to microprocessor 120 via output line 135.

Shift register 128 serves as a sixteen-bit qualifier register (hereinafter referred to as the Q-register) into which information may be transferred bit-serially from ALU 116 via T-bus 52 and out of which information may be transferred bit-serially to ALU 116 via R-bus 54. Information contained in the five least significant bit positions of Q-register 128 is transferred to I/O gating control circuitry 58 as five one-bit I/O qualifier control signals Q00-Q04 via five parallel output lines 136, and information contained in the six next least significant bit positions of the Q-register is transferred to I/O control 60 as six one-bit I/O qualifier control signals Q05-Q10 via six parallel output lines 138. Similarly, information contained in the seven least significant, the ninth and eleventh least significant, and the most signifcant bit positions of Q-register 128 and information derived from the thirteenth, fourteenth, and fifteenth bit positions of the Q-register may be transferred to microprocessor 120 as eleven one-bit microprocessor qualifier control slignals Q00-Q06, Q08, Q10, Q15, and QMR via eleven output lines 140. Information contained in the twelfth through the fifteenth least significant bit positions of Q-register 128 may be transferred to microprocessor 120 as a four-bit primary address code via four parallel output lines 142.

Shift register 130 serves as a four-bit serial extend register (hereinafter referred to as the E-register) into which information may be transferred bit-serially either from ALU 116 via T-bus 52 or from the least significant bit position of T-register 84 via input line 144. Information may also be transferred out of E-register 130 to ALU 116 via R-bus 54.

Register unit 114 also includes control circuitry 146 for controlling the transfer of parallel binary-coded-decimal information into and out of A-register 122 and the transfer of serial binary information into and out of A-register 122, B-register 124, P-register 126, Q-register 128, and E-register 130. This is accomplished in response to register microinstructions from microprocessor 120, control signals TTX and XTR from I/O control 60, and shift clock control pulses from programmable clock 118. Control circuitry 146 includes a flip-flop 148 (hereinafter referred to as the A/B flip-flop) for enabling the transfer of information into and out of either the A-register 122 or the B-register 124 as determined by the state of the A/B flip-flop. The state of A/B flip-flop 148 is initially determined by information Q11 transferred to the A/B flip-flop from the twelfth least significant bit position of Q-register 128 but may be subsequently complemented one or more times by microinstruction CAB from microprocessor 120.

ALU 116 may perform either one-bit serial binary arithmetic on data received from T-register 84 of M-register 82 via S-bus 50 and/or from any register of register unit 114 via R-bus 54 or four-bit parallel binary-coded-decimal arithmetic on data received from T-register 84 via output lines 112 taken with S-bus 50 and/or from A-register 122 via output lines 134 taken with R-bus 54. It may also perform logic operations on data received from memory unit 46 and/or register unit 114 via any of these lines. The arithmetic and logic operations performed are designated by ALU microinstructions from microprocessor 120 and are carried out in response to these microinstructions, shift clock control pulses from programmable clock 118, and control signal SCB from I/O control 60. Information is also transferred from ALU 116 to A-register 122 via output lines 132 or to I/O register 56, M-register 82, T-register 84, or any register or register unit 114 via T-bus 52 in response to microinstructions and control signals applied to these registers. If a carry results while ALU 116 is performing either one-bit serial binary arithmetic or four-bit parallel binary-coded-decimal arithmetic, the ALU issues a corresponding qualifier control signal QBC or QDC to microprocessor 120 via one of two output lines 152 and 154.

Programmable clock 118 incudes a crystal-controlled system clock 156, a clock decoder and generator 158, and a control gate 160. System clock 156 issues regularly recurring clock pulses to clock decoder and generator 158 via output line 162. In response to these regularly recurring clock pulses from system clock 156 and to four-bit clock codes from microprocessor 120, clock decoder and generator 158 issues trains of n shift clock pulses to ALU 116, M-register 82, T-register 84, and all of the registers of register unit 114 via output line 164. These trains of n shift clock pulses are employed for shifting a corresponding number of bits of serial information into or out of any of these registers or for shifting a carry bit in the ALU. The number n of pulses in each of these trains may vary from one to sixteen as determined by the number of bits of serial information required during each operation to be performed. In response to a control signal CCO from microprocessor 120, control gate 160 prevents any shift clock pulses from being applied to the ALU or any of these registers. Upon completion of each train of n shift clock pulses, clock decoder and generator 158 issues a ROM clock pulse to microprocessor 120 via output line 166 and an I/O clock pulse to I/O control 60 via output line 168. In response to the regularly recurring clock signal from system clock 56, clock decoder and generator 158 also issues correspondingly regularly recurring memory clock pulses to memory unit 46 via output line 170.

Microprocessor 120 selectively issues two I/O microinstructions to I/O control 60 via two output lines 172, six memory microinstructions to memory unit 46 via six output lines 174, thirteen register microinstructions to register unit 114 via thirteen output lines 176, and five ALU microinstructions to ALU 116 via five output lines 178. It also issues a four-bit clock code associated with each of these microinstructions to clock decoder 158 via four output lines 180. These microinstructions and associated clock codes are issued as determined by the control signal POP from the power supply, the eleven microprocessor qualifier control singals from Q-register 128, the four-bit primary address codes from Q-register 128, and the five microprocessor qualifier control signals from I/O control 60, interrupt control 65, ALU 116, and P-register 126.

As shown in the simplified flow chart of FIG. 7, microprocessor 120 executes a hardware diagnostic routine (stored within the microprocessor itself) in response to the control signal POP. Upon completion of this diagnostic routine, ALU 116 issues the qualifier control signal QBC indicating whether or not the diagnostic routine was successful. Microprocessor 120 thereupon responds to this qualifier control signal by entering the basic machine operating loop and issuing microinstructions causing a sixteen-bit instruction stored in ROM 80 to be loaded into T-registter 84 and transferred from there to Q-register 128. Microprocessor 120 thereupon sequentially responds to one or more additional qualifier control signals by issuing microinstructions and associated clock codes for executing the instruction then contained in Q-register 128 and causing another sixteen-bit instruction stored in ROM 80 to be loaded into T-register 84 and transferred from there to the Q-register. When an instruction requiring multiple branching is contained in Q-register 128, microprocessor 120 issues a pair of microinstructions UTR and XTR causing the microprocessor to respond to a four-bit primary address code from the Q-register by issuing additional microinstructions and associated clock codes for executing the instruction contained in the Q-register.

As illustrated by the basic machine operating loop shown in the flow chart of FIG. 7, microprocessor 120 initially responds to the qualifier control signal QNR either by issuing microinstructions and associated clock codes for interrupting the basic machine operating loop and executing an I/O service routine or by issuing microinstructions and associated clock codes for loading A/B flip-flop 148 with the information Q11 contained in Q-register 128. The manner in which microprocessor 120 responds is determined by the condition of the qualifier control signal QNR, which in turn indicates whether or not the basic machine operating loop should be interrupted.

Assuming the basic machine operating loop is not to be interrupted, microprocessor 120 loads the information Q11 into A/B flip-flop 148 and responds to the qualifier control signal QMR either by issuing microinstructions for transferring an address portion of the instruction contained in Q-register 128 from T-register 84 into M-register 82 or by responding to another qualifier control signal Q15. Again, the manner in which microprocessor 120 responds is determined by the condition of the qualifier control signal QMR, which in turn indicates whether or not the instruction contained in Q-register 128 is a memory reference instruction.

Assuming the instruction contained in Q-register 128 is a memory reference instruction, microprocessor 120 transfers the required address information into the M-register 82 and reponds to qualifier control signal Q10 either by issuing microinstructions and associated clock codes to select the base page of the memory (i.e. page 0) or by issuing microinstructions and associated clock codes to select the current page of the memory (i.e. the page from which the instruction contained in Q-register 128 was obtained). In either case, the microprocessor then issues microinstructions as required to read data from the preset page of the memory at the address designated by the address information last transferred into M-register 82. Upon completion of this operation, microprocessor 120 responds to qualifier control signal Q15 by issuing additional microinstructions and associated clock codes to execute an indirect memory access operation if the condition of this qualifier control signal indicates that the address information contained in M-register 82 is indirect.

Assuming the address information contained in M-register 82 is direct (or upon completion of the indirect memory access operation), microprocessor 120 issues microinstructions and associated clock codes causing the microprocessor itself to respond to a four-bit primary address code from the Q-register. The microprocessor responds by issuing additional microinstructions and associated clock codes for executing whichever one of ten possible memory reference instructions is contained in Q-register 128 and designated by the four-bit primary address code. Folowing execution of the designated memory reference instruction, microprocessor 120 issues microinstructions and associated clock codes causing another sixteen-bit instruction stored in ROM 80 to be loaded into T-register 84 and transferred from there to Q-register 128, thereby beginning another cycle of the basic machine operating loop.

As illustrted by other possible paths of the basic machine operating loop shown in FIG. 7, microprocessor 120 sequentially responds to other qualifier control signals when other types of instructions are contained in Q-register 128. For example, when an I/O instruction is contained in Q-register 128, microprocessor 120 sequentially responds to qualifier control signals QNR, QMR, Q15, Q10, and QRD by issuing microinstructions and associated clock codes to execute the I/O instruction. It should be noted that the microprocessor qualifier control signals not shown in the simplified flow chart of FIG. 7 are variously contained within those flow chart blocks requiring decisions as will hereinafter become apparent.

The calculator firmware operational diagram of FIG. 9 illustrates the basic components of the calculator firmware. These components comprise routines which reside in the calculator ROM 80 and serve to implement the definition of the calculator. Control information passing between routines is represented by solid lines on the drawing.

Referring to FIG. 9, it is shown that the calculator hardware units are controlled by firmware routines contained in ROM 80. These units comprise an on-off power switch 182, an alphanumeric keyboard input unit 12, a display unit 18, and a magnetic tape cassette reading and recording unit 14. The firmware routines also control an external printer 20, external tape cassette reading and recording units 14, and various other external input-output devices 244.

Operation of the calculator is begun by placing the on-off switch in the on position, thus forcing the hardware internal to the calculator to execute the instruction located at address 0000 of ROM 80. This instruction directs control to the start-up routine 200, which is shown in the flowchart of FIG. 83, and described in detail on page 53 of the basic system firmware listing. The purposes of this routine are to initialize RWM 78, set the stack pointer address at location 1777, set the keyboard execution numeric output format to float 9, initialize certain variables in the system RWM area for later use by other firmware routines, and initialize the various read-write pointers to the user read-write memory area shown in detail in the memory map of FIG. 6.

After completion of the start-up routine, control is passed to the keyboard monitor routine 202 shown in the flowchart of FIGS. 84A-D and detailed on pages 53-56 of the basic system firmware listing. This routine initializes certain variables in the system RWM 78 for use by the keyboard input routine 204. It also outputs the automatic line number if necessary. It then calls for an input record from the keyboard input routine 204. When the keyboard input routine returns with a record the keyboard monitor routine searches the mnemonic tables in the assembly language program area shown in FIG. 6. It then searches the mnemonic tables in each of the plug-in read-only memory modules of FIG. 4E and finally searches the mnemonic tables of the main system ROM 80. A complete assembly language listing of each of the tables in read-only memory is given in the firmware listings. The subroutines which do the search of the mnemonic tables are detailed in the flowcharts of FIGS. 85, 86, and 87. If a match is found between the characters of the input record and any of the mnemonic tables, the keyboard monitor branches through a jump table to the appropriate syntax routine 210 for syntax analysis if the mnemonic is a statement, or branches through a jump table for execution if the mnemonic is a system command. A separate syntax analysis routine is provided for each statement and a separate execution routine is provided for each system command. Syntax and execution routines for statements and commands on an optional read-only memory module are contained in the firmware of that module. The assembly language program area is handled in the same fashion as the plug-in read-only memory module. If no mnemonic is found, control is passed to the implied LET syntax routine.

The keyboard input routine 204 is detailed in the flowcharts of FIGS. 88A-G, 89A-B, and 90-93. It calls on the display refresh routine 206 to refresh the 32 character single line display 18 between key entries. The display refresh routine is detailed on page 35 of the firmware listing. When a key is entered through the alphanumeric keyboard 12, the interrupt circuitry causes the calculator to execute the instruction at address 00002. This instruction causes a jump to the interrupt routine 208, which is detailed in the flowchart of FIGS. 117A-B and pages 259 and 258 of the firmware listing. The interrupt routine 208 saves the keycode in a memory location of the system RWM 78 and returns. The keyboard input routine 204 reads this memory word and decides what operations need to be performed for that particular keycode. The shift bit is stripped from the keycode and stored as a flag in a temporary location in system RWM 78. If the key requires that a mnemonic name be displayed, the single line display buffer shown in FIGS. 5A-B is cleared and the mnemonic name is entered. If an editing function is required, a routine is called to perform the editing function. If a user-definable key f0-f9 has been given, the user-definable key routine 228 is called. If an alphanumeric key has been given, the shift flag in RWM 78 is tested, and, if the shift has been given, the keycode is converted to the code for the shifted key. Then the keycode is inserted into the single line display buffer shown in FIGS. 5A-B, either at the end of the line or at the cursor position, if the cursor is within the line.

The user-definable key routines 228 perfom the special operations for keys f0-f9. They are detailed in the flowcharts of FIGS. 99A-F and pages 43-47 of the firmware listing.

The syntax routines 210 translate the characters of the input record into an internal format which is more easily handled by the execution routines. If a syntax error is encountered control is passed to the error routine 238 which outputs an error message. The error routine is shown in the flowchart of FIG. 95 and the firmware listing at pages 58 and 59. If no error is found, control is passed to either the memory management routines 236, if the statement is to be stored in memory, or to the routine for initialization for keyboard execution if the statement is to be executed. The memory management routines are shown in the flowcharts of FIGS. 96A-D, 97, and 98 and pages 16 and 60-62 of the firmware listings. The routine 230 for initialization for keyboard execution serves to initialize the run time stacks shown in the memory map of FIG. 6. This routine is detailed in the flowchart of FIG. 100C and pages 109-110 of the firmware listing.

When the RUN command is given, or if the INIT key is actuated, control is passed to the pre-execution processing routines 232. These routines are detailed in pages 65-77 of the firmware listing. They serve to initialize the symbol table and non-common value table areas of the user read-write memory shown in FIG. 6.

Control is next passed to the execution monitor 214, which is detailed in the flowchart of FIGS. 100A-B and pages 108-110 of the firmware listing. This routine initializes the run time stacks in the user read-write memory of FIG. 6 and initiates execution of a stored program beginning at the line number given by the user. After each statement is executed control is returned to the execution monitor, which prints the line number of the next line if the program is being executed in the trace mode. Step, stop, or error conditions are checked and program execution is terminated if any of these conditions exist. If program execution is to be continued, the jump address of the execution routine for the next statement of the program is computed, and control is passed to that routine.

Several of the statement execution routines 240 require evalution of arithmetic functions and expressions. This is done in the formula evaluation routines 242. Several of the statement execution routines 240 require input from or output to various external input-output devices 20 and 244. This is done by calling the standard output driver 224 or an optional special I/O driver 234. Several of the statement execution routines require input from or output to an internal or external tape cassette unit 14. This is done by calling the tape cassette drivers 226. The statement execution routines for the statements that communicate with the tape cassette units are detailed in the flowcharts of FIGS. 110-115 and pages 250-276 of the firmware listing.

The list routine 220 is used when listing stored programs on either the single line display 18 or an external ASCII output device 20. The list routine is detailed on pages 78-82 of the firmware listing. Its function is to translate the stored program from the internal stored format into a string of ASCII characters which can be printed or displayed. To print a line of translated characters, the list routine calls on the standard output driver 242 which is detailed in FIG. 94E and pages 20 and 33 of the firmware listing.

Detailed assembly language information relating to all of the firmware routines and subroutines herein described may be obtained by referring to the memory map of FIGS. 4A-F and the basic system firmware listing located at a later point in this specification.

Communication with the routines in the various plug-in read-only memory modules is accomplished through a series of mnemonic tables and jump tables. The standard firmware, the cassette operating firmware, and each of the plug-in read-only memory modules all contain the following tables:

1. A statement mnemonic table 2. A statement syntax jump table 3. A statement execution jump table 4. A system command mnemonic table 5. A system command execution jump table 6. A function mnemonic table 7. A function execution jump table 8. A non-formula operator mnemonic table

All of these tables, with the exception of the statement execution jump table, may appear anywhere within a memory module. The last five words in each module are used by the table scan routines of FIGS. 85-87 to find the actual location of the tables. The last word of each module contains a unique operation code word for that particular module. The second from the last word contains a relative address of the statement mnemonic table. The third from the last word contains a relative address of the system command mnemonic table. The fourth from the last word contains a relative address to the function mnemonic table. The fifth from the last word contains a relative address to the non-formula operator table. The jump tables for statement syntax, system command execution, and function execution are located directly above their respective mnemonic tables. The statement execution jump table is located directly above the fifth from the last word of each module. The complete set of tables for the standard firmware is shown in the firmware listings at pages 48-49, 103-104, 131, and 141.

Each of the mnemonic tables consists of a string of seven-bit ASCII character and six-bit operation code characters packed two characters per sixteen-bit word. The eighth bit of each character is used to indicate whether that character is ASCII or an operator code. A zero in the eighth bit indicates ASCII and a one indicates an operation code. The seventh bit of each operation code character is used to indicate whether that operation code is the last character in that table. The jump table address for each mnemonic is found by subtracting the operation code for that mnemonic from the startng address of the associated mnemonic table. The internal stored format for program statements consists of a series of operation codes, operand codes, and other special codes. The first word of each statement contains the line number of that statement in binary format. The second word contains both the operation code for that particular statement mnemonic and also the length of the statement. The length information is used by various firmware routines to scan from one statement to the next. The third word contains the operation code for the table or optional read-only memory module, and it also contains the first operand code. The remainder of the statement is stored with one operator code and one operand code in each word.

Formula operation codes from the table on page 132 of the firmware listing and mnemonic operation codes are stored in a five-bit field, bits 10-14. The operand codes are stored in two five-bit fields. Bits 5-9 are used to store the operand name. The name consists of an ASCII letter, A-Z, with its sixth and seventh bits removed. For example, the ASCII code for A is 1000001 and the five-bit operand code for A is 00001. Bits 0-4 are used to store the operand type. Bit 15 is used as a special flag bit. When bit 15 is set, the operand field is interpreted differently than when it is not set. The following table shows the various operand types and the special codes.

______________________________________OPER-ANDTYPE OPERAND TYPECODE (BIT 15=0) MEANING IF BIT 15=1______________________________________ Full Precision Constant follows Variables in next word00000 Simple variable00001 Array of 1 dimension Fixed point decimal00010 Array of 2 dimensions Floating point decimal00011 Array of unknown dimension Binary integer Split Precision Variables00100 Simple variable Binary line number00101 Array of 1 dimension00110 Array of 2 dimensions Integer Precision Variables01000 Simple variable01001 Array of 1 dimension01010 Array of 2 dimensions Full Precision Variables Letter followed by digit10000 010001 110010 210011 310100 410101 510110 610111 711000 811001 911110 String Variable Bits 5-9 contain the11111 User defined function operation code of a function in ROM______________________________________

As an example, the internal stored format for the following statements is shown in the table below:10 DIM A[5] 20 LET B=C+FND(E) FND(E) GOTO 10015 14-10 4-5 4-00 00000 00000 01010 100 00010 00000 00111 DIM op-code -- Length 7 0 01010 00001 00001 ##STR1##- integer follows0 00011 [0 00000 00000 00101 5- null operand0000 00000 ]0 00000 00000 10100 200 10110 00000 00111 LET op-code -- Length 70 01010 00010 00000 Table op-code -- B- C 00111 00011 00000 =- FND01001 00100 11111 +0 10101 00101 00000 ( -- E0 00100 00000 00000 ) -- null operand0 00000 00000 11110 300 00110 00000 00100 GOTO op-code -- Length 41 01010 00000 00100 Table op-code -- integer follows0 00000 00011 00100 100

All operations performed by the calculator may be controlled or initiated by the keyboard input unit and/or by keycodes entered into the calculator from the keyboard input unit, the magnetic tape cassette reading and recording unit, or peripheral input units such as the marked card reader and stored as program steps in the program storage section of the RWM. An operational description of the keyboard input unit is therefore now given with specific reference to the perspective view of the calculator as in FIG. 1 and the plan view of the keyboard as in FIG. 8, except as otherwise indicated.

Line Switch

An on-off line switch 182, which may be considered as part of the keyboard input unit, controls the application of power to the calculator and hence initiation of the control signal POP from the power supply.

As shown in FIG. 2, the calculator may be operated at 240, 220, 120, or 100 volts +5%, -10% as determined by a pair of line voltage selector switches mounted at rear panel 34 of the calculator housing and at a line frequency within the range of 48 to 66 Hertz. The calculator is provided with a 6-amp fuse and either a 1-amp fuse for operation at a line voltage of 220 or 240 volts +5%, -10% or a 2-amp fuse for operation at a line voltage of 100 or 120 volts +5%, -10%. It is also provided with a three-conductor power cable 184 which, when plugged into an appropriate AC power outlet, grounds the calculator housing. The maximum power consumption of the calculator is 150 voltamps. No more than a total of 610 voltamps may be drawn from AC power outlets 42 provided for peripheral units.

Execute the EXECUTE (often referred to as EXEC) key, when pressed, will perform the indicated operations previously keyed in, if any, and display the result of any arithmetic statements on the 32-character display. (Although the display is only 32 characters, an 80-character line can be keyed in with automatic scrolling both for programs and for keyboard operations.) Most keys, when pressed, immediately cause their mnemonic to be displayed. However, pressing certain keys, such as PRT ALL (to be discussed later), allows a particular mode to be in effect till that mode is overridden. Fixed n, float n immediately after either turn-on or SCRATCH EXEC, the user read/write memory area is cleared; numerical calculations that are executed will be displayed in float-nine notation. The values 2 and 12 in float-nine notation would appear as 2.000000000E+00 and 1.200000000E+01, respectively. Float 9 refers to the nine digits succeeding the decimal point; E symbolizes .times. 10 raised to the power of the two digits following the E.

NOTE

In this text, individual keyboard operations will be identified by being italicized; e.g., 3 + 2 EXEC. (On the display would appear 5.000000000E+00.) You can specify the desired notation by pressing FIXED N or FLOAT N followed by the appropriate number from 0 through 11. The designated N indicates the number of digits to be displayed to the right of the decimal point after execution. For example: FIXED N 7 EXEC, then 1 2 3 4 5 6 . 7 EXEC, displays 123456.7000000 or, 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 . 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 EXEC, displays 123456789.1230000* FLOAT N 5 EXEC, then 1 2 3 . 4 EXEC displays 1.23400E+02 or, . 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXEC displays 1.23457E-01** In fixed-n notation, a maximum of 12 digits will be displayed to the left of the decimal point; beyond that value the calculator reverts to float-n notation, with the number of digits displayed to the right of the decimal point determined by the particular fixed-n. * The machine calculates to 12 significant digits regardless of the display length. ** Since only five digits can be displayed to the right of the decimal point the fifth digit is rounded. The FIXED N and FLOAT N keys are not programmable; that is, they can be used only in keyboard operations. Output formatting under program control is accomplished by a format statement, which is discussed below. The calculating range of the calculator is: -9.99999999999 .times. 10.sup.99 through -10.sup.-.sup.99, 0, and 10.sup.-.sup.99 through 9.99999999999 .times. 10.sup.99. Clear, delete line pressing either CLEAR or DELETE LINE will erase whatever previously had been displayed during keyboard operations. Pressing either key will cause (the Lazy T) to appear on the far left of the display, indicating that the calculator is available for new inputs. The difference between the two keys occurs when a stored program line is displayed; DELETE LINE will erase the line from the stored program, whereas CLEAR will only erase the display and not affect the program line itself. (A program line can also be deleted by keying in the line number followed by END OF LINE.) Recall pressing RECALL during keyboard operations allows the last line that was executed to be recalled to the display; pressing RECALL during program-inputting operations allows the last program line that was input to be recalled to the display. If an error message appears on the display when an attempt is made either to execute a line in keyboard mode or to input a program line into memory, pressing RECALL will allow the original line to be reviewed for editing purposes. Result pressing CLEAR RESULT EXEC displays the numerical value of the last arithmetic statement that was executed. The RESULT key not only allows the result of the previously executed statement to be reviewed, but also can function as an accumulator during arithmetic operations; e.g., by pressing 2 + 4 EXEC (in FIXED 2 notation) displays 6.00, then pressing 3 + RESULT EXEC displays 9.00, then pressing 4 + RESULT + RESULT EXEC displays 22.00. Keying in either R E S or R E S U L T has the same effect as pressing the RESULT key. Print all by pressing PRINT ALL, you can determine whether or not the calculator is in print all mode. If ON appears, both the expression and the result of any executed calculation will be typed on whichever printing device is plugged into the calculator; if OFF appears, the information will appear only on the display. Pressing the PRINT ALL key a second time causes the alternative mode to be in effect. In the print all mode, each program statement is printed when END OF LINE is pressed. All error messages are also printed. Back, forward, insert the BACK and FORWARD keys can be used to edit expressions on the display. Successive presses of the BACK key will move a blinking cursor to the desired location within the display. Editing can then be performed at this location. The FORWARD key performs the same function as the back key, but in the opposite direction. At the location of the blinking cursor, the following editing can be performed: 1. A character can be inserted by pressing INSERT. (This opens up a space to the left of the cursor, thereupon moving the cursor to the location of the space; additional presses of the INSERT key will open up more spaces, with the cursor always positioning itself in the left-most space, thus allowing for the immediate insertion of more than one character.) 2. A character can be changed by overscoring it with another character. 3. A character can be deleted by pressing either the space bar or SHIFT INSERT, the only difference being that pressing SHIFT INSERT will close up the space of the deleted character. Holding either BACK or FORWARD down for approximately 1.5 seconds will cause the cursor to move in rapid succession in the chosen direction. Once a line is appropriately edited, it can be immediately executed without having to move the cursor to the end of the line. .fwdarw., .rarw. When a line that is greater than 32 characters (80 characters maximum) is being input, the characters to the left of the display are pushed out of the display region to make room for the additional characters. To view the beginning of the input, press .fwdarw. (the right arrow); this operation moves the characters in the display to the right. Pressing .rarw. (the left arrow) performs the reverse operation. Either arrow key, when held down for approximately 1.5 seconds, will repeat its operation in rapid succession.

ARITHMETIC

There are five basic numerical operators: add (+), subtract (-), multiply ( ), divide (/), and exponentiate (.uparw.). The order of execution, known as the hierarchy, is identical to the BASIC hierarchy described below. The BASIC functions described below are available on the Calculator simply by keying in the appropriate mnemonics. In addition, the value of .pi. can be obtained by keying in P I. when operating on trigonometric functions, the calculator assumes the angle to be in radians unless otherwise stated. To express an angle in either degrees or grads, first clear the display, then press either D E G EXEC or G R A D EXEC, respectively; then key in the expression. To revert to radians, clear the display, then press R A D EXEC. Radians, degrees, and grads are also programmable commands. Variables the simple scalar variables are A through Z and A0 through Z9 (286 total). Simple variables can be used in keyboard operations; e.g., pressing A 3 = 7 EXEC assigns the value of 7 to A3. Unless the value of A3 is then changed or erased from memory, pressing 4 * A 3 EXEC will display 28. If a variable is undefined, any attempt to use this variable in an expression (other than by assigning a value to it) will result in an error message. An array is an ordered collection of numerical data. An array (subscripted) variable can have either one or two dimensions as indicated by the subscripts, which are presented as numbers within parentheses. A (m) is a one-dimensional array (or column vector) where m designates the row of the element; A(m,n) is a two-dimensional array where m designates the row and n designates the column of the element. The maximum size of an array is limited by the available calculator memory. At normal 12-point precision, the effective memory limitation would be approximately a (30, 30) array. Arrays should be referenced in either a common statement or a dimension statement before use in a program; if not, the program defaults to either a 10 element array for a singly subscripted array, or a 10 by 10 array for doubly subscripted arrays.

TAPE CASSETTES

The present Calculator is capable of operating with 10 tape cassettes: One cassette is available through the built-in (internal) cassette drive. Four peripheral cassette drives can be connected directly to the calculator through the four I/O slots in the rear panel. Five more peripheral cassette drives can be added if the user has an I/O expander box (in all, 11 peripheral devices can be added by having an expander box).

Syntax the tape cassette commands have general syntactical rules which will be briefly described. The general command form, with minor variations, is: Command [unit] [file], or Command [unit] (file) [lnx.sub.1 [lnx.sub.2 ]] brackets [ ] indicate that the enclosed information is optional; parentheses () indicate that the enclosed information is required with the particular command. Command -- the various commands will be individually discussed. Unit -- individual units are referenced by the number sign, #, followed by the select code; the internal cassette is designated by #10 (if no select code is given, the internal cassette is assumed); the nine peripheral cassettes are identified by #1 through #9. File -- files within individual cassettes are identified by file numbers; if no file is identified by number, the scratch-pad (or default) file, file 0, is assumed. Lnx.sub.1 -- indicates the beginning line number to be affected by the command. Lnx.sub.2 -- indicates either the line number where program execution is to begin following the command implementation, or the ending line number to be accessed in the command. In any command whose syntax allows LNX.sub.1 and LNX.sub.2, in order for LNX.sub.2 to be designated, LNX.sub.1 must have been specified. All information to be input following the command must be separated by commas. In keyboard mode, press EXEC after fulfilling the syntax requirements of a particular command to implement the command. Preparing a fresh cassette to prepare a fresh cassette (one which has no markings), first open the cassette door by pressing downward on the switch on the far right of the keyboard; then insert the cassette (print-side up) into the slot built into the door; be certain that the tape is wound around the left spindle -- if it is not, but you wish to prepare that side of the cassette anyway, simply close the door and press REWIND. to store information onto the cassette, first mark the files that are to be used.

PROGRAMMABLE COMMANDS

The following tape cassette commands are programmable: mark, store, load, merge, store key, load key, store date, load data, load binary, rewind, find, and tlist. These commands can also be used in the keyboard mode. The secure command, on the other hand, can be used only in the keyboard mode. Mark the mark command produces the designated number of files and defines the file lengths (by the number of 16-bit words per file). Syntax: MARK [UNIT] (No. of FILES) (LENGTH) e.g., M A R K # 1 0 , 5 , 1 0 0 0 EXEC -- since unit #10 identifies the internal cassette, including it is superfluous; the 5 indicates the number of files to be made available; the 1000 signifies the number of 16-bit words per file. Successive files on the tape can be marked with different word lengths as shown in the following example; MARK 3, 1000 EXEC then, MARK 2, 2000 EXEC will mark files 0, 1, 2 of the internal cassette with 1000-word lengths and will mark files 3, 4 of the same cassette with 2000-word lengths. The length of a file can be changed; however, changing it will affect all the files following it by distorting their contents. To change the length of a particular file, first position the cassette at that file by using FIND (FIND will be discussed more thoroughly, later); then mark the file with the desired length. For Example: to mark file 12 of the internal cassette with 1000 words, press FIND 12 EXEC then press, MARK 1, 1000 EXEC To mark files not previously marked (virgin files), first perform a TLIST; TLIST will be discussed thoroughly later; but for now, merely knowing that TLIST [UNIT] EXEC will list all the marked files, is sufficient. To mark virgin files, it is first necessary to mark the last file listed in TLIST*. As previously discussed, this file is located by the find command. Beginning with this file, successive virgin files can be marked by the methods previously discussed. * The number of files referenced in TLIST is always one more than the number marked by the user. To mark the beginning of a tape, be certain that the tape is completely rewound. Store the store command will take the program line numbers in read/write memory, and put them in the designated tape location where they will be saved. Syntax: STORE [UNIT] [FILE] or STORE [UNIT] (FILE) [LNX.sub.1 [LNX.sub.2 ]] e.g., STORE #2 , 3 EXEC. select code #2 designates which cassette is being accessed; the program will then be stored on that cassette in file number 3. In the store command, LNX.sub.1 and LNX.sub.2 are used to store a portion of the program: LNX.sub.1 specifies the beginning line number to be stored; LNX.sub.2 specifies the ending line number to be stored. If LNX.sub.2 is not specified, the last line to be stored is assumed to be the highest-numbered program line. For LNX.sub.2 to be given, it is always necessary to have LNX.sub.1 ; this is true for any cassette command. In addition, whenever LNX.sub.1 is to be given, the file to be accessed must be identified; e.g., STORE 3 , 150 EXEC: file 3 of the internal cassette is located; program lines 60 through 150 in memory will then be stored into file 3.

Note

Once a cassette has been marked, any file that has been marked can be accessed by giving its designated file number in a command; e.g., if five files are marked, information can be stored in file 4 even though file 3 is a virgin (empty) file, by pressing STORE 4 EXEC.

Load, link the load common will take a program that is stored on a cassette and put it into the memory area. Syntax: LOAD [UNIT] [FILE] or, Load [unit] (file) [lnx.sub.1 [lnx.sub.2 ]] e.g., LOAD EXEC assumes the internal cassette, default file (file 0) is to be loaded into the calculator; any program previously in the 9830A memory will be erased. LOAD 5 , 40 , 10 EXEC locates file 5 on the internal cassette; the entire program on this file is renumbered beginning at line number 40, and then the program is loaded into memory; program execution is initiated at line number 10. All program line numbers beginning at line 40, that were previously in memory, will be erased and replaced by the program being loaded; if the memory previously had line numbers 10, 20, 30, it will retain them. In both the load and the merge command, the use of LNX.sub.1 and LNX.sub.2 can have various results. Rules for predicting the results are given at the conclusion of the merge command discussion. By substituting LINK for LOAD in the previous syntax, the user can implement the link command. This command operates identically to the load command with one exception: During program execution, if a load statement is encountered, the calculator functions as though RUN EXEC were pressed -- that is, the old symbol table is destroyed and a new symbol table is built; on the other hand, if a link command is encountered, the calculator functions as though CONT EXEC were pressed -- that is, all variables retain their previous values. Merge the merge command attempts to take program line numbers from the cassette and position them in read/write memory in front of the program currently there, between consecutive line numbers in the program currently there, or behind the program currently there. However, if any line number of the program to be entered matches a line number currently in the program, an error will result. In addition, if the line numbers of the two programs are interwoven, an error will occur; e.g., if the program currently in memory has line numbers 10, 20, 30, 40 and if the program to be merged has line numbers 15, 25, 35, the merge command will cause an error message to occur even though no two line numbers matched. Syntax: MERGE [UNIT] [FILE] or, Merge [unit] (file) [lnx.sub.1 [lnx.sub.2 ]] e.g., MERGE #2, 1, 200, 100 EXEC -- file 1 of the cassette with select code #2 is located; the entire program on this file is renumbered beginning at line number 200 (LNX.sub.1) and then it is combined with the program currently in memory. Following implementation of the command, program execution will begin at line number 100 (LNX.sub.2). either the merge or the load command can be used for stacking programs in read/write memory. The major difference between the two commands is as follows: LOAD will erase the line numbers previously in memory, beginning at the designated LNX.sub.1 ; MERGE, on the other hand, will retain all line numbers previously in 9830A memory. In both the load and the merge command, LNX.sub.1 and LNX.sub.2 are predictable. Regardless of the mode, LNX.sub.1 renumbers the program line numbers of the accessed file to begin at LNX.sub.1 ; the spacing between consecutive line numbers remains the same; all GO TO statements, etc. are properly adjusted to reflect the new line numbers; this program is then loaded into user memory. In program mode: 1. If LNX.sub.2 is given, program execution will continue at LNX.sub.2. 2. if LNX.sub.2 is not given, program execution will continue either at the next higher line number of the original program or at LNX.sub.1, whichever comes first. In keyboard mode: 1. If LNX.sub.2 is given, program execution will begin at LNX.sub.2. 2. if LNX.sub.2 is not given, the calculator will halt after loading in the program. Store key, load key the store key command will take all user definable keys (upper left-hand region of the keyboard) that have been defined and put them on a cassette file, which will be tagged as a key file. The load key command takes the user definable information from the cassette and positions it in memory such that each user definable key performs the same operation that it previously did before being stored on tape. Syntax: STORE KEY [UNIT] (FILE) Load key [unit] (file) spacing may arbitrarily be left between the words STORE and KEY and the words LOAD and KEY. In general, the HP Basic language ignores blank spaces (except, of course, in a quote field where every character and space is duplicated). Store data, load data the store data command takes a block of data from memory and puts it on a cassette. Normally, only arrays can be stored using this command; however, if no array is specified in the command, all data in the common statement of the program can be stored. The calculator allows simple variables in the common statement, as well as arrays; in fact, the common statement can accept simple variables, array variables, integer arrays and variables, and split arrays and variables. The common statement acts like a dimension statement with the additional feature that data in common is saved from program to program. The load data command takes the data that was previously stored on a cassette file, and loads it into mainline memory, If an array has been stored, then LOADDATA must specify an array; if LOADDATA does not specify an array, an error will result. If, on the other hand, the common area will be retrieved by the load data command (in this case, no particular array can be specified in the command, lest and error occur). Syntax: STOREDATA [UNIT] (FILE) [ARRAY] Load data [unit] (file) [array] e.g., STORE DATA 6, B EXEC will locate file 6 on the internal cassette; then the B array in the current program will be stored in this file. (A simple variable cannot be stored in this manner.) LOADDATA 6, B EXEC can then retrieve the B array and load it into memory whenever it is needed; the following command could be given, also: LOADDATA 6, C EXEC: this would retrieve the B array and load it into memory in place of the C array, provided B and C are the same size and type. Assume the common statement in a program looks like this: 1 COM A(8), B(5,5), D3, E. pressing: STORE DATA 2 EXEC will store all the common statement variables into file 2 of the internal cassette. Both the array variables and the simple variables will be retrieved by pressing: LOAD DATA 2 EXEC. Pressing: LOAD DATA 2, A EXEC is illegal and causes an error since no particular array can be retrieved from a file if it was stored in common. In all store and load data commands, the file to be accessed must be identified, even if it is the default file (file 0). Load bin the load binary command will transfer binary information -- assembly language program -- from the cassette to the user memory. The assembly language program may be a system diagnostic, an I/O subroutine, or a simulated option block designed to perform some specific function. The assembly language program cannot be listed or displayed. Syntax: LOAD BIN [UNIT] (FILE)

Note

Files on cassettes are tagged as: program files, key files, data files, or binary files. If an attempt is made to load from a particular file and the load command incorrectly identifies the file tag, an error will occur; e.g., pressing LOAD KEY 1 EXEC when file 1 is a program file, causes an error message to appear.

Rewind pressing the REWIND key, located on the right-hand side of the keyboard, immediately rewinds the internal tape cassette to the clear leader. To rewind any other cassette, R E W I N D must be typed in, followed by the select code of the particular cassette. (The internal cassette can also be rewound by typing in R E W I N D EXEC.) r e w i n d must be typed if the command is to be used in the programming mode. Syntax: REWIND [UNIT] e.g., R E W I N D #2 EXEC will rewind the cassette with select code .andgate.2. Find the find command (previously mentioned in conjunction with the mark command) is used to locate a particular file. While the cassestte is searching for the file number, a laxy T appears on the display. During this interval, the cassette is searching under interrupt control, thus returning control of the calculator keyboard to the user. This feature allows for the execution of one portion of a large program, while another portion is being found -- thereby improving access time. When the specified file is found, the cassette tape halts. Syntax: FIND [UNIT] (FILE) e.g., FIND # 3, 2 EXEC causes the cassette with select code #3 to search until file number 2 is located. Tlist beginning with the current tape location, this command reads all subsequent file identifiers and prints out information concerning each file. Syntax: TLIST [UNIT] The information for each file, on the designated cassette, is printed out on one line. There are no column headers identifying the information in each line; the assumed headers are: File No. File Type* Absolute Actual Program Line Nos. Common Area(Code No.) File Size File Size (Beginning) (Ending) (in words) (in words) (in words) (LNX.sub.1) (LNX.sub.2)*The code numbers identifying the file types are as follows:1 binary2 data3 program (source)4 key In addition, if the file is secured, the number 2 appears in front of the code number (this applies only to binary, source, and key files); e.g., if 24 appears in the second column, the file is a secured key file. If a file is a data file, LNX.sub.1, is superfluous; in this case the data is described in this column as: 0 full precision 1 split precision 2 integer precision 3 common If the file is not a program file, the last two columns will contain no information.

NON-PROGRAMMABLE COMMANDS

Secure this command has the capability of concealing program lines from potential users; that is, your program could be given to another, and that person could load and run it - however, he would not be able to fetch particular program lines for viewing purposes nor could he store the program on any other cassette file. An attempt to fetch a secured program line will result in the line number appearing on the display, followed by an *; attempts to list the program will result in the secured line numbers appearing followed by an *. If any lines in a program are secured, the entire program is considered to be secured; that is, even though certain program statements are visible, hone of the program can be reproduced onto another cassette file. Syntax: SEC [LNX.sub.1 [LNX.sub.2 ]] or SECURE [LNX.sub.1 [LNX.sub.2 ]] It is therefore, possible to secure specific lines within a program; e.g., pressing: SEC 30, 80 EXEC, followed by STORE 2 EXEC secures lines 30 through 80 of the program in memory and then stores both the secured and unsecured portions of the program into file 2 of the internal cassette. When a program is initially secured, it can still be reproduced onto as many files as necessary; however, once the program is scratched from memory, (even though it can be loaded back into memory) it cannot be reporduced onto any cassette files. When program lines are secured, the entire calculator is in the secured mode. Therefore, after the secured program is stored away, the user should press SCRATCH A before inputting other programs -- thus, avoiding secured-program errors. User definable keys (when not being used as typing aids) can be secured, too. Just press FETCH (particular key) SEC EXEC and the designated key will be secured.

Note

To protect all the information on a particular cassette, break one of the tabs on the top of the cassette; this makes the cassette inaccessible for further storage.

PROGRAMMING

The programming language of the Calculator is, with minor variations, BASIC as described below. Instructions to the computer within a program are provided by program statements. Each statement in Basic has an associated line number which must appear in the left-most portion of the statement.* Statement line numbers appear in ascending order with 9999 being the largest possible line number. *The length of a statement, including the line number and including appropriate spacing, can be up to 80 characters. A program statement, which has been correctly keyed in, can be stored in read/write memory by pressing the END OF LINE (EOL) key. This key is situated in an area corresponding to the carriage return/line feed key on a teletype keyboard. Auto # as previously mentioned, statement line numbers can be automatically input. In its simplest form, pressing AUTO # EXEC causes line number 10 to immediately appear on the display awaiting the program statement. The line numbers of additional statements will be in ascending order with a spacing of ten between consecutive line numbers. The AUTO # (AUTO) syntax and the examples to follow present some of the alternatives in automatic line numbering. Syntax: AUTO # [LNX.sub.1 [Spacing]] Lnx.sub.1 is the beginning line number to be automatically input; the desired spacing between lines can then be input if LNX.sub.1 is given. If no spacing is indicated, a spacing of 10 is assumed. E.g., AUTO # 30 EXEC AUTO # 40 , 2 EXEC AUTO # EXEC30 40 1040 42 2050 44 30. . . . . . . . . When AUTO # is pressed, AUTO appears in the display.

Note

Although the CLEAR and DELETE LINE keys have previously been discussed, the following point should be made. If a program line currently being keyed in is found to be totally unacceptable (not worth salvaging by using the editing keys), it can be erased by using either the CLEAR or the DELETE LINE keys. However, if the pogram line numbers have been automatically input, pressing CLEAR not only erases the entire display but also eliminates the AUTO # mode, whereas pressing DELETE LINE erases only the program statement without affecting the line number itself.

PROGRAM VIEWING

There are two methods of viewing a program that is currently in memory: 1. List it on a printing device. 2. Bring it line-by-line to the display. List the list command has two specific applications: it can be used to provide a total listing of the programs in read/write memory, or it can be used to indicate the read/write memory available for inputting; e.g., LIST EXEC lists all program lines that are in memory on the user's standard printing device. LIST #3 EXEC lists all program lines that are in memory on the peripheral with select code #3. LIST9999 EXEC causes the number of 16-bits words available in memory to be displayed. .dwnarw., .uparw. If a specific program line is in the display, pressing .dwnarw. (down arrow) displays the next higher-numbered program line *; pressing .uparw. (up arrow), on the other hand, displays the next lower-numbered program line. When no program line is currently in the display, pressing .dwnarw. would display the successively higher line from the one most recently displayed, whereas .uparw. would display the successively lower line. *It should be noted that if a program line has more than 32 characters, the first 32 characters will be displayed; by pressing .rarw., the rest of the line can be viewed as the display is scrolled to the left. At the end of the line appears. Fetch in addition to viewing a program line-by-line, specific program lines can be immediately brought to the display by using the fetch command. Syntax: FETCH [LNX.sub.1 ] Where LNX.sub.1 is the specific line number to be accessed; e.g., FETCH EXEC always displays the lowest-numbered program line. FETCH 300 EXEC displays line 300 if it exists; if line 300 is not available (and there are other higher-numbered lines), the line immediately higher than 300 will be displayed; if there are no line numbers as high as 300, the highest-numbered line available in memory will be displayed.

PROGRAM EDITING

Any displayed program line can be edited by using the BACK, FORWARD, and INSERT keys. The RECALL key, previously discussed, need only be briefly mentioned. A program line is keyed in; if an error message appears on the display when EOL is pressed, the program line can be reviewed by pressing RECALL. Appropriate editing can then be performed on the program line. The previously input line can always be recalled by pressing RECALL whether or not an error appears. CLEAR and DELETE LINE have already been thoroughly discussed. However, to reiterate, there are two methods of deleting a program line currently in memory: 1. If the line is currently in the display, pressing DELETE LINE will erase it from memory (CLEAR only clears the display). 2. Any line in memory can be immediately deleted by keying in the appropriate line number followed by EOL. Delete the delete command (to be distinguished from DELETE LINE) can selectively delete program lines. Syntax: DELETE [LNX.sub.1 [LNX.sub.2 ]] or DEL [LNX.sub.1 [LNX.sub.2 ]] where LNX.sub.1 is the first line to be delected and LNX.sub.2 is the last line to be deleted: e.g., DELETE EXEC deletes all program lines; DELETE 40 EXEC deletes all statements beginning at line number 40; DELETE 50, 80 EXEC deletes all lines numbered 50 through 80. Scratch the scratch command can erase a variety of things from memory: e.g., SCRATCH EXEC erases all program lines and variables; SCRATCH A EXEC erases everthing from memory -- program lines, user definable keys, variables (identical to turning the calculator off, then on again); SCRATCH K EXEC erases all user definable keys (user definable keys will be discussed later); SCRATCH V EXEC erases all variables; SCRATCH (particular UD key) erases the particular user definable key that was pressed -- pressing EXEC is not required in this case. Scratch can be accessed either by keying in the seven letters or by pressing SCRATCH. Renumber the renumber command will take all the program line numbers and renumber them. Syntax: RENUMBER [LNX.sub.1 [SPACING]] or REN [LNX.sub.1 [SPACING]] Where LNX.sub.1 will be the new line number of the first program statement, and SPACING will be the spacing between consecutive line numbers: e.g., Ren exec will renumber all statements by numbering the first statement 10 with a spacing of 10 between statements; RENUMBER 30 EXEC renumbers the first statement 30 with a spacing of 10 between statements; REN 45, 20 EXEC renumbers the first statement 45 with a spacing of 20 between statements. All statements in the program that reference another line number are appropriately corrected with the renumber command; e.g., GO TO 80 would be corrected to reference the line that replaced 80.

PROGRAM DEBUGGING

Normal, trace the TRACE key can be used to determine the order of statement execution for a program that is currently running. Pressing TRACE during program execution causes the line numbers to be printed in the order in which they are accessed; then pressing NORMAL reverts the calculator to the normal mode. Thus, when a program is running, both TRACE and NORMAL are immediate execute keys. When no program is running, to revert to either trace or normal mode requires pressing the appropriate key followed by EXEC. Trace mode can be set up to trace specific line numbers. Syntax: TRACE [LNX.sub.1 [LNX.sub.2 ]] Where LNX.sub.1 is the first line number to be traced, and LNX.sub.2 is the last line number to be traced; e.g., TRACE 20 EXEC will trace beginning at line number 20 when the program is running. TRACE 50, 60 EXEC will trace beginning at line number 50 and ending at line number 60, each time these line numbers are executed in the program. Stop the stop command can be a statement within a program (to be discussed later) and can be used as a debugging tool. As a debugging tool, STOP is extremely valuable. A program that is running can be stopped at any time by pressing STOP (the current line number of the program will be displayed). If any program lines are then edited, the program must be rerun from the beginning, using the RUN key. If no editing has been performed, the program can continue where it left off if the CONT key (to be discussed in detail later) is pressed. While a program is stopped, the values of variables can be checked to determine if the program is doing what was intended; e.g., pressing A EXEC would determine the present value of the simple variable A. while a program is stopped, STOP* , can have another funtion. Pressing STOP displays STOP; then keying in either one line number or two line numbers separated by a comma -- indicates that the calculator should stop program execution at these line numbers. Pressing CONT EXEC will then start program execution; e.g., STOP 80 EXEC then CONT EXEC or RUN EXEC will cause the program to halt at line number 80. Once a program is running under these conditions, there is one way to revert to normal program execution: After the program has halted, press STOP EXEC, then CONT EXEC, and the program will no longer stop at the given line numbers. *When key is not being used as an immediate execute key, whether the key itself is pressed or whether the letters displayed on the key are individually keyed in, is generally arbitrary. Step after a program is halted by a stop command, execution can continue by pressing STEP. STEP is always immediate execute; it causes the program to execute the appropriate statement and then to halt. Therefore, after each statement is executed, it can be checked to ensure that it performed the required function. When a particular function is considered satisfactory, either CONT or STEP can be pressed; CONT will execute the rest of the program while STEP will execute the next program statement only. Run, continue pressing RUN EXEC causes a program to begin execution at the first statement regardless of whether the program had previously been halted by a stop command; however, if the program had been halted by a stop command, pressing CONT EXEC will begin program execution where it had previously halted. As previously mentioned if a program is edited after it has been halted, program execution is reinitialized at the first line by RUN EXEC*. However, if, during the halt, the values of variables are changed or other internally-programmed conditions are changed, then CONT EXEC must be pressed to keep these newly adjusted conditions intact. The following things can be done to the program while it is halted if, upon completion, the program is executed by pressing CONT EXEC: 1. variables can be changed; e.g., B = 5 EXEC sets the simple variable B equal to 5. 2. Angular units in trigonometric functions can be changed to measure in radians, degrees, or grads, depending on the user's requirements; e.g., DEG EXEC will assume all angles to be in degrees. 3. Write, print, and display statements can be input from the keyboard (these statements will be discussed later). 4. The data pointer, which indicates the next datum to be encountered, can be reset to the beginning of the data by typing R E S T O R E EXEC. 5. the program can go to a particular statement and be available for execution there, e.g., GO TO 80 EXEC sets the program line counter to 80 for either step-by-step or continuous execution. (If continuous execution is desired at line number 80, the continue command can be employed, as discussed below.) IF ... THEN can also access a particular line number. 6. Any calculator-keyboard statements can be executed. A halted program can be executed beginning at any line number by using the continue command; e.g., CONT 95 EXEC will continue execution starting at line number 95. *The initialize command, to be discussed later, is also legitimate. A program can be run beginning at any line number; e.g., RUN 110 EXEC will begin program execution at line number 110.

NOTE

The major difference between RUN and CONT is that RUN initializes all variables in the program and reverts to all normal program modes, while CONT neither affects any variables nor affects any current program modes.

PROGRAM STATEMENTS

Let as in Basic LET A = 6 is a legitimate statement; however, the implied let statement is also allowed. Thus, A = 6 is the same as LET A = 6. Go to, go sub the GO TO and GO SUB statements are the same as in Basic; however, each statement has one additional feature called respectively, the computed GO TO and the computed GO SUB. In either case an expression is evaluated and the rounded integer value of the expression is determined; the integer then acts as a pointer to a particular line number from a parameter listing in the statement. Some examples should explain this feature more clearly: (In all examples, the present value of T will be 2.) 20 GO TO T.uparw.2-3 OF 250, 350, 450 Since the integer value of the expression is one, the first parameter following OF will be accessed (line number 250). 80 GO SUB T+2.5 OF 130, 260, 330, 370, 490 The rounded integer value of the expression is 5; therefore, the subroutine beginning at line number 490, the fifth parameter following OF, will be accessed. (Decimal values of 0.5 and above are always rounded) to the next higher integer value.) Any legitimate expression can be used; if the rounded value is either less than 1 or greater than the number of parameters following OF, then the line number following the GO TO or GO SUB statement is executed. Print the calculator has one feature in the print statement not generally available in BASIC. Alphabetic information in a quote field can be printed in either upper or lower case letters. Printing in lower case is just the opposite of that on a regular typewriter; with shift or shift lock pressed, letters inside the quote field will be printed in lower case (the display, however, will still appear in upper case). If the "at" symbol () is required, press SHIFT RESULT. Quote fields in both the format and write statements also have this lower case feature available. Display the display statement performs the same function as a print statement; the difference is that the information appears on the display rather than on a printing device. Thus, when a permanent record of the information is desired, the print statement should be used. The syntax used is DISP. Format, write the format statement is a means of structuring program printouts in a specified manner. The write statement defines the variables, constants, etc. that will appear on the printout; it also determines the device to be printed upon and the particular format statement to be followed. The following examples should adequately explain the features in both the format and the write statements: e.g., 5 FORMAT F10.2 6 write (15, 5) .7 printout will be 0.70 where the " " indicates a blank space. F10.2 -- the F refers to fixed-point format; 10 refers to the total field width reserved for the printout 2 refers to the number of digits to the right of the decimal point. Excess space to the right of the decimal point will be filled with zeros; one space is reserved for the decimal point; two spaces are reserved to the left of the decimal point, one for a digit preceding the decimal point, another for a sign (however, only minus signs are printed). (15, 5 -- in the write statement, the information within parentheses is required. 15 refers to the printing device to be used (select code 15 refers to the standard printer); 5 refers to the line number of the format statement that is being accessed (in this case line number 5). The format statement, which is being accessed, can appear anywhere in the program listing. .7 -- in the write statement, the information following the right parenthesis is to be printed according to the designated formats. The value is always right-justified within its field width. e.g., 20 A = 62.4 ##STR2## The format statement, the write statement, and the printout all have individual fields referenced; interlinking fields are represented by corresponding reference numbers. Since the write statement references the format statement numbered 25, values in the write statement will be formatted as specified in this format statement. References 1 e12.2 indicates exponential (floating-point) notation with a field width of 12 and two digits to the right of the decimal point. The printout displays the exact form. Remember the field width must be large enough to include a leading sign, the decimal point and E.+-.XY. Since printouts from the write statement are right justified and since 231 takes up only 8 of the 12 character field width, the four blank spaces are to the left of the value. 2 The value -61 in the write statement totally fills the F7.3 field, therefore there is no space between this value and the previous value in the printout. Since F7.3 indicates three digits to the right of the decimal point, zeros are supplied in this case. 3 X indicates a space between values; therefore, the values supplied for the F7.3 and E8.1 formats will be separated in the printout by at least one space. 4 The value, -12.4 totally fills up E8.1, in fact, the last digit is suppressed since, with this field designation, only one digit can follow the decimal point. 5 / tells the printing device to skip one carriage return to the beginning of the next line. 6 2F4.0 specifies two consecutive fixed-point formats of F4.0 to be used for values in the write statement. The first format is for the value of A, which from program line number 20 if 62.4; when a fixed-point format specifies zero digits to the right of the decimal point, the value supplied is rounded to be an integer and the decimal point is suppressed -- 62, in this case. Since the carriage return had previously been specified, this value is printed on the beginning of the next output line. 7 Quote fields are printed in the sequence in which they occur. Since this quote field is in the write statement, it is printed immediately after 62.4 is printed in F4.0 format. Note the space in front of IS; without this space, the printout would read 62IS instead of 62 IS. Quote fields can appear in either the format or write statements. 8 The value, .4 is also to be printed in F4.0 format. The rounded integer value of .4 is 0 is 0 -- hence, the printout. 9 3X indicates there should be three spaces between the values supplied for the F4.0 and the E9.0 formats. 10 Expressions can be specified in write statements. The value of A+3 is 65.4; however, with this format, it will be rounded to 7.E+01. The decimal point is not suppressed in floating-point notation when zero is specified as the number of digits to the right of the decimal point. If there are more values presented in the write statement than there are formats in the referenced format statement, the formats will be repeated; e.g., 10 FORMAT F6.2, E10.2 20 write (15, 10) 18, 21, 19.3, 29.6, .71 printout will be: 18.00 2.10E+01 19.30 2.96e+01 0.71 after the first two values are printed according to the specified formats, the output printer's carriage return is activated, then two more values are printed according to the same two specified formats, etc. Formatting Rules: In fixed-point format, Fm.n, m stipulates total field width and n stipulates the number of digits to the right of the decimal point. If n>0, the minimum field width allowable is m = n + 3; e.g., F4.1 for a value of -.6 would print -0.6, which takes up the total field width of 4. If n = 0, the minimum field width is m = 2; e.g., F2.0 for a value of -7 would print -7, thus taking up the allotted field width. In floating-point format, Em.n, m and n are the same as in fixed-point format. However, the minimum field width allowable is always m = n + 7. The following are all allowed in format statements: Fm.n -- fixed-point formats; Em.n -- floating-point formats (often called exponential or scientific notation); X -- space; / -- carriage return (for printing device); **** -- quote field; B -- binary format (where write statement could have octal number, the binary equivalent would be output). All of the above can be duplicated any number of times by leading the symbol with the appropriate number. The following are all allowed in write statements: constants, variables, expressions, and quote fields. It should be noted that a write statement can be input from keyboard mode; that is, the write statement can reference the line number of a format statement in memory without being in the program itself. The maximum width of both the fixed-point and the floating-point fields in 9,999. However, the programmer is effectively restricted by the allowable characters per line of the printing device. The information in the format statement must be separated by commas. The information in the write statement must be separated either by commas or semicolons; generally it makes no difference. However, one additional feature of the write statement is that it can perform the identical operations as the print statement; the benefit is the ability of the write statement to select the device to be printed upon. To write on a punched tape photoreader with select code 2, the write statement could be set up in the following manner: 30 WRITE (2, *) A; B; C, D the * indicates that no format statement is referenced; thus, WRITE acts like a PRINT statement: data will be left justified, semicolons pack the output fields, commas spread out the fields, etc. P tape as in BASIC, PTAPE causes the computer to read in a program from the punched tape photoreader. If the photoreader select code is 5, then pressing either PTAPE No. 5 or PTA No. 5 will perform this task unless no photoreader is connected to the calculator. If a photoreader is not connected, the calculator will wait till one is hooked up to complete the command. During this time the display will be blank. During the implementation of this command, lines being loaded into memory have their syntax checked; if a line is in error, it will be rejected -- thus, only those lines with correct syntax are loaded into the calculator. To obtain a record of the rejected lines, it is necessary to put the calculator in the print-all mode prior to pressing PTA No. 5; in print-all mode, all rejected lines are printed.

Note

To punch information onto paper tape, use the list command as discussed earlier.

Multiline functions multiline functions serve the same purpose as single-line functions with the added capability of being able to describe more sophisticated functions. In single-line functions the general form of the defining function is: statement number DEF FN single letter A to Z (simple variable)* = expression * The simple variable is a dummy variable which indicates where the actual argument of the function is used in the defining expression. In multiline functions, the general form is the same aside from the equal sign and the expression; for in a multiline function, the expression can be spread out over many statement numbers. Thus, an extremely complicated expression can appear in a more simplified manner; additional flexibility is also gained in that the value of any variable within the expression can be computed for a given value of the argument of the function; e.g., 10 W = .5 When this program is run, D will return a20 Y = 2 value of 32. The return statement returns30 PRINT FNA (3) the result of FNA (X) which, in this case,40 STOP is equal to D. Line 40, the stop statement50 DEF FNA (X) is needed to keep the calculator from try- 60 ##STR3## ing to re-execute lines 50 through 90 after70 Q = Z + 3 D is printed; without STOP in line 40, an80 D = Q/W error occurs in line 60 since a second pass90 RETURN D beginning at line 50, would be made with100 STOP X undefined. Any variable evaluated in the expression can be returned by the return statement, and multiple return statements are allowed; e.g., 10 X = 3 100 RETURN Z 20 INPUT Y 110 ##STR4##30 WRITE (15,900) FNG (Y) 120 IF Q -< 100 THEN 15040 END 130 PRINT "Q ="50 DEF FNG (Y) 140 RETURN Q60 Y = Y + 1 150 PRINT "Z IS" 70 ##STR5## 160 RETURN Z80 IF Z -< 100 THEN 110 900 FORMAT F12.190 PRINT "Z =" 1000 END______________________________________ In this example, a variable can be returned from three different lines (100, 140, 160) depending on the initial value of Y; Z can be returned from both lines 100 and 160 if the value of Y meets certain criteria. Caution must be taken as to the placement of the statement that calls the function (in both examples, statement 30), and it is generally advisable to put a stop statement immediately after this statement (as in line 40 of both examples); otherwise, an undesirable loop may develop. If correctly entered, the function of a function can be evaluated. Stop, end stop was previously discussed, with emphasis on its program debugging capabilities. Now it will be discussed as a program statement, emphasizing the differences between it and the end statement. When the program encounters a stop statement, it halts and is waiting; if CONT EXEC is then pressed, the program will continue with the statement following the STOP. This is not true if an end statement is encountered; the program will halt, but if CONT EXEC is pressed, the calculator will revert back to the lowest-numbered statement in memory. Therefore, the stop statement should be used between stacked programs that are to be run sequentially. When STOP is used in this manner, the values of simple variables can be passed from program to program. A program should be terminated by encountering either a STOP or an END. The highest-numbered program statement need not be an end statement.

INPUTTING DATA

Program data can be input in three ways: the input statement, the read and data statements and the initialize command. The input statement and the read and data statements are thoroughly discussed below. Initialize the INITIALIZE key, when pressed, allocates storage space in memory for array variables. After the required data is keyed in, the program can be executed by pressing CONT EXEC; remember -- RUN EXEC erases the values of all variables, thereby requiring all variables to be defined in the program itself. Simple variables can always be input in keyboard mode without using the INITIALIZE key, as long as CONT EXEC is pressed to run the program. Since array variables can be input in keyboard mode by using the initialize command, it is not necessary to define any variables in the program itself. It is still necessary, however, to identify arrays in either a dimension or a common statement.

USER--DEFINABLE KEYS

There are ten User-Definable Keys (UDK) in the upper left-hand block of the keyboard. There are, however, effectively 20 accessible UDK's since each key can be accessed normally or with the shift key held down.

To enter UDK mode, press FETCH (particular UDK); the display will then read, KEY indicating the mode. To exit from UDK mode, press CLEAR E N D EXEC; the scratch command can also be used to exit from UDK mode -- this command will, of course, erase certain information in the process. UDK mode is automatically exited when certain sequences are followed; these cases will be discussed later. The user-definable keys can be used effectively in three ways: 1. to represent text (where text can be used as a typing aid); 2. to represent functions (where different values can be passed to the function); 3. To represent programs.

REPRESENTING TEXT

If a key represents text, merely pressing the key will immediately display the text without erasing anything that was previously on the display. Thus, commonly used words and phrases can be put on keys to serve as typing aids. Text can be put on a key in the following manner. First, access a key by pressing FETCH (particular UDK). Then, press * followed by a character string* and finally EOL. Besides inputting the character string, pressing EOL in this sequence takes the user out of UDK mode. Any time the programmer wishes to use a character string, he must press the key into which the desired character string was input. *The maximum length for the character string (including the *) is 80 characters. If, for example, a key was accessed by FETCH (particlar UDK); then * FORMAT F10.2.,X, E10.1 EOL was input. If subsequently program line number 60 needed this format, pressing 60 (particular UDK EOL will put line number 60 into memory with the required format. A typing-aid key can be used as an immediate execute command if an * is placed both in front of the text and following the text; e.g., FETCH (UDK) * LOADDATA #4, 6, B * EOL This command will be immediately executed whenever the UDK is pressed. To use a key that has text, merely press the key. Pressing FETCH (particular UDK) will display the * with the text; however, text can be edited if the fetch command is used. Pressing FETCH and then * will erase the old character string and then wait for new text to be input.

REPRESENTING FUNCTIONS

A user definable key can be used to represent functions --either single or multiline. In either case, after the key is accessed, the function must be preceded by a line number -- input either manually or automatically. After a key has been accessed, the following function could be input: 10 DEF FNA (X) = 7 * X =3 EOL Whenever a value is to be passed to X (the argument of the function), first press the appropriate key; the display will read FNA. Then key in the appropiate value of the argument, which can be either a constant or an expression (e.g., 20), and press EXEC; the value of the function will then be displayed (in this case, 137). The same result could have been achieved by using the fetch command; however, FNA would not appear automatically on the display; it would have to be keyed in along with the argument; e.g., FETCH (UDK) FNA 20 EXEC would also display 137. If a multiline function, DEF FND (Z), has been input, pressing the appropriate UDK causes FNB to be displayed; as before, passing a value to the argument, Z, and then pressing EXEC will compute and display the value of the function. Functions in mainline memory and in a UDK can be called, regardless of the current operating mode. If a function in the calculator is defined in more than one place, the first function found with the designated name will be accessed. If the user is in UDK mode, the calculator will search for the function in the following order: 1. The current UDK program will be checked. 2. The first line of each key (in the order defined) will be checked. 3. Mainline memory will be checked. If the user is not in UDK mode, the order of the search will be steps 3 and 2, respectively.

REPRESENTING PROGRAMS

A udk can be used to represent an entire program. Programming rules in UDK mode are consistent with those discussed above. There is one restriction, however; if a common statement is used, its size must be less than or equal to the size of the common statement in the mainline program -- for there is only one common area allocated to memory. To run a program that is represented in a UDK, it is advisable to press RUN (particular UDK) or FETCH (UDK), then INIT (particular UDK). The program can be continued merely by pressing the (particular UDK); but if there are array variables in the program, pressing only the key will cause these variables to be undefined (similar in this respect to the continue command, which neither destroys the old symbol table nor builds a new one). After executing the program, the calculator will exit from UDK mode. Programs represented on a UDK generally use only simple variables for the obvious ease of handling. To list program lines on a particular UDK, press: LIST (particular UDK); pressing LIST EXEC in the UDK mode will list the program lines on the key currently being accessed. To selectively list particular lines on the UDK, it is first necessary to FETCH a key; then use the list command as discussed below. To load a program from a cassette file onto one particular key, first FETCH the key, then give the load command followed by EXEC. Program lines on a particular key can be stored onto the cassette in the same manner; text (as a typing aid), however, cannot be stored in this manner. Store key and LOAD KEY can be used for any UDK regardless of the information on the key. The use of these keys is discussed below. This is a BASIC statement: /10 INPUT A,B,C,D,E

Comments

A statement contains a maximum of 80 characters A statement may also be called a line. STATEMENT NUMBERSEach BASIC statement begins with a statement number (inthis example, 20): 20 LET S=(A+B+C+D+E)/5

Comments

The number is called a statement number or a line number. The statement number is chosen by you, the programmer. It may be any integer from 1 to 9999 inclusive. Each statement has a unique statement number. The computer uses the numbers to keep the statements in order. Statements may be entered in any order; they are usually numbered by fives or tens so that additional statements can be easily inserted. The computer keeps them in numerical order no matter how they are entered. For example, if statements are input in the sequence 30,10,20; the computer arranges them in the order: 10,20,30. INSTRUCTIONSThe statement then gives an instruction to thecomputer (in this example, PRINT): 30 PRINT S

Comments

Instructions are sometimes called statement types because they identify a type of statement. For example, the statement above is a "print" statement. OPERANDSIf the instruction requires further details, operands(numeric details) are supplied (In this example, 10;on the previous page, "S"): 40 GO to 10

Comments

The operands specify what the instruction acts upon; for example, what is PRINTed, or where to GO. A PROGRAMThe sequence of BASIC statements 10 INPUT A,B,C,D,Egiven on the previous pages is 20 LET S=(A+B+C+D+E)/5called a program. 30 PRINT SThe last statement in a program, 40 GO TO 10as shown here, is 50 END

Comments

The last (highest numbered) statement in a program must be an END statement. The END statement informs the computer that the program is finished. FREE-FORM LANGUAGEBASIC is a "free format" language--the computerignores extra blank spaces in a statement. Forexample, these three statements are equivalent: 30 PRINT S 30 PRINT S 30 PRINTS

Comments

When possible, leave a space between words and numbers in a statement. This makes a program easier for people to read. TERM* SIMPLE VARIABLEDefined in Basic as: A letter (from A to Z); or a letter immediately followed by a digit (from 0 to 9).Examples: A0 B M5 C2 Z9 D

Comments

Variables are used to represent numeric values. For instance, in the statement: 10 LET M5 = 96.7 m5 is a variable; 96.7 is the value of the variable M5. there is one other type of variable in BASIC, the array (subscripted) variable; its use is explained in Section IV. TERM: NUMBERDefined in Basic as: A decimal number (the sign is optional) between 1E-99 and 9.999999999999E+99 Zero is included in this range.Examples:-10008 5 3.14159 10E+37126.257 0 10 E37 10E-3716.01 .06784 -10 E37 1.0E+2 TERM: E NOTATIONDefined in Basic as: A means of expressing numbers having more than six decimal digits, in the form of a decimal number raised to some power of 10 .Examples: 1.00000E+ 06 is equal to 1,000,000 and is read: "1 times 10 to the sixth power" (1.times.10.sup. 6). 1.02000E+ 04 is equal to 10,200 1.02000E- 04 is equal to .000102

Comments

E notation is used to print numbers having more than six significant digits. It may also be used for input of any number. When entering numbers in E notation, leading and trailing zeroes may be omitted from the number; the + sign and leading zeroes may be omitted from the exponent. The precision of numbers is 12 decimals digits TERM EXPRESSIONDefined in Basic as: A combination of variables, con- stants and operators which eval- vates to a numeric value.Examples: (P + 5)/27 (where P has previously been assigned a numeric value.) Q - (N + 4) (where Q and N have previously been assigned numeric values.) TERM ARITHMETIC EVALUATIONDefined in Basic as: The process of calculating the value of an expression. The ASSIGNMENT OPERATORSymbol: =Examples: 10 LET A = B2 = C = 0 20 LET A9 = C5 30 LET Y = (N-(R+5))/T 40 LET N5 = A + B2 50 LET P5 = P6=P7=A=B=98.6General Form: LET variable = expression

Purpose

Assigns an arithmetic or logical value to a variable.

Comments

When used as an assignment operator, = is read "takes the value of," rather than "equals". It is, therefore, possible to use assignment statements such as: LET X = X+2 this is interpreted by BASIC as: LET X take the value of (the present value of) X, plus two. Several assignments may be made in the same statement, as in statements 10 and 50 above. See Section V, Logical Operations for a description of logical assignments. RELATIONAL OPERATORSSymbols: = # <> > < >= <=Examples: 100 IF A=B THEN 900 110 IF A+B >C THEN 910 120 IF A+B < C+E THEN 920 130 IF C>=D*E THEN 930 140 IF C9<= G*H THEN 940 150 IF P2#C9 THEN 950 160 IF J <> K THEN 950

Purpose

Determines the logical relationship between two expressions, as equality: =inequality: # or <>greater than: >less than: <greater than or equal to: >=less than or equal to: <=

Comments

Note: It is not necessary for the novice to understand the nature of logical evaluation of relational operators, at this point. The comments below are for the experienced programmer. Expressions using relational operators are logically evaluated, and assigned a value of true or false (the numeric value is 1 for true, and 0 for false). When the = symbol is used in such a way that it might have either an assignment or a relational function, BASIC assumes it is an assignment operator. For a description of the assignment statement using logical operators, see Section V, Logical Operations. ARITHMETIC OPERATORS Symbols: ##STR6##Examples: 40 LET N1 = X-5 ##STR7## 60 LET A = (B-C)/4 ##STR8## Represents an arithmetic operation, as: exponentiate: ##STR9##multiply: *divide: /add: +subtract: - The "-" symbol is also used as a sign for negative numbers. It is good practice to group arithmetic operations with parentheses when unsure of the exact order of precedence. The order of precedence (hierarchy) is: .tbd. * / + - with .tbd. having the highest priority. Operators on the same level of priority are acted upon from left to right in a statement. See Order of Precedence in this Section for examples. The symbols + and - are also used to indicate unary plus and unary minus. For example, negative numbers may be expressed in a statement without using parenthesis: 10 LET A1 = -B 20 let c2 = d ++e 30 let b5 = b --c see Order of Precedence in this section for examples or how unary + and unary - are interpreted. THE AND OPERATORSymbol: ANDExamples: 60 IF A9<B1 AND C#5 THEN 100 70 IF T7#T AND J=27 THEN 150 80 IF P1 AND R>1 AND N AND V2 THEN 10 90 PRINT X AND Y

Purpose

Forms a logical conjunction between two expressions. If both are true, the conjunction is true; if one or both are false, the conjunction is false. Note: It is not necessary for the novice to understand how this operator works. The comments below are for experienced programmers.

Comments

The numeric value of true is 1, of false is 0. All non-zero values are true. For example, statement 90 would print either a 0 or a 1 (the logical value of the expression X AND Y) rather than the actual numeric values of X and Y. control is transferred in an IF statement using AND, only when all parts of the AND conjunction are true. For instance, example statement 80 requires four true conditions before control is transferred to statement 10. See Section V, Logical Operations for a more complete description of logical evaluation. THE OR OPERATORSymbol: ORExamples: 100 IF A>1 OR B<5 THEN 500 100 PRINT C OR D 120 LET D = X OR Y 130 IF (X AND Y) OR (P AND Q) THEN 600

Purpose

Forms the logical disjunction of two expressions. If either or both of the expressions are true, the OR disjunction is true; if both expressions are false, the OR disjunction is false. Note: it is not necessary for the novice to understand how this operator works. The comments below are for experienced programmers.

Comments

The numeric values are: true = 1, false = 0. All non-zero values are true; all zero values are false. Control is transferred in an IF statement using OR, when either or both of the two expressions evaluate to true. See Section V, Logical Operations for a more complete description of logical evaluation. THE NOT OPERATORSymbol: NOTExamples: 30 LET X = Y = 0 35 IF NOT A THEN 300 45 IF (NOT C) AND A THEN 400 55 LET B5 = NOT P 65 PRINT NOT (X AND Y) 70 IF NOT (A=B) THEN 500

Purpose

Logically evaluates the complement of a given expression. Note: it is not necessary for the novice to understand how this operator works. The comments below are intended for experienced programmers.

Comments

If A = 0, then NOT A = 1; if A has a non-zero value, NOT A = 0. the numeric values are: true = 1, false = 0; for example, statement 65 above would print 1, since the expression NOT (X AND Y) is true. Note that the logical spsecifications of an expression may be changed by evaluating the complement. In statement 35 above, if A equals zero, the evaluation would be true (1); since A has a numeric value of 0, it has a logical value of false, making NOT A true. See Section V, Logical Operations for a more complete description of logical evaluation. ORDER OF PRECEDENCEThe order of performing operations is: ##STR10##NOT unary + unary* /+ -Relational OperatorsANDORlowest precedence

Comments

If two operators are on the same level, the order of execution is left to right, for example: 5 + 6*7 is evaluated as: 5 + (6.times.7) 7/14*2/5 ##STR11## Parentheses override the order of precedence in all cases, for example: 5 + (6.times.3) is evaluated as: 5 + 18 and 3 + (6+(2.uparw.2)) is evaluated as: 3 + (6+4) Unary + and - may be used; the parentheses are assumed by BASIC. For example: A + + B is interpreted: A + (+B) c - + d -5 is interpreted: C - (+D)-5 leading unary + signs are omitted from output by BASIC, but remain in program listings.

STATEMENTS

Statements are instructions to the calculator. They are contained in numbered lines within a program, and execute in the order of their line numbers. Statements cannot be executed without running a program. They tell the calculator what to do while a program is running. Here are some examples mentioned in Section I: let print input do not attempt to memorize every detail in the Statements subsection; there is too much material to master in a single session. By experimenting with the sample programs and attempting to write your own programs, you will learn more quickly than by memorizing.THE LET STATEMENTExamples: 10 LET A = 5.02 20 LET X = Y7 = Z = 0 ##STR12## ##STR13##General Form:statement number LET variable = number or expression orvariable . . .

Purpose

Used to assign or specify the value of a variable. The value may be an expression, a number, or a variable.

Comments

The assignment statement must contain: 1. A statement number, 2. LET is optional 3. The variable to be assigned a value (for example, B9 in statement 30 above), 4. The assignment operator, an = sign, 5. The number, expression or variable to be assigned to the variable (for example, 5*(X.uparw.2) in statement 30 above). Statement 20 in the example above shows the use of an assignment to give the same value (0) to several variables. This is a useful feature for initializing variables in the beginning of a program. REMExamples: 10 REM--THIS IS AN EXAMPLE 20 REM: OF REM STATEMENTS 30 REM-----/////*****!!!!! 40 REM. STATEMENTS ARE NOT EXECUTED BY BASICGeneral form: statement number REM any remark or series of characters

Purpose

Allows insertion of a line of remarks or comment in the listing of a program.

Comments

Must be preceded by a line number. Any series of characters may follow REM. rem lines are part of a BASIC program and are printed when the program is listed or punched; however, they are ignored when the program is executing. Remarks are easier to read if REM is followed by a punctuation mark, as in the example statements. PRINTThis sample program gives a variety of examples of the PRINT statement.The results are shown below. 10 LET A=B=C=10 20 LET D1=E9=20 30 PRINT A,B,C,D1,E9 40 PRINT A/B,B/C/D1+E9 50 PRINT "NOTE THE POWER TO EVALUATE AN EXPRESSION AND PRINT THE" 60 PRINT "VALUE IN THE SAME STATEMENT." 70 PRINT 80 PRINT 90 REM* "PRINT" WITH NO OPERAND CAUSES THE TELEPRINTER TO SKIP A LINE.100 PRINT "`A` DIVIDED BY `E9` =";A/E9110 PRINT "11111", "22222", "33333", "44444", "55555", "66666"120 PRINT "11111"; "22222"; "33333"; "44444"; "55555"; "66666"130 ENDRESULTSRUN10 10 10 20 20 1 20.05NOTE THE POWER TO EVALUATE AN EXPRESSION AND PRINT THEVALUE IN THE SAME STATEMENT.`A` DIVIDED BY `E9` = .511111 22222 33333 44444 5555566666111112222233333444445555566666 NOTE: The "," and ";" used in statements 110 and 120 have very different effects on the format. General Form:statement number PRINT expression , expression , . . .orstatement number PRINT "any text" ; expression ; . . .orstatement number PRINT "text" ; expression ; "text" , "text" , . . .orstatement number PRINT any combination of text and/or expressionsorstatement number PRINT

Purpose

Causes the expressions or "text" to be output to the Printer Causes the printer to skip a line when used without an operand.

Comments

Note the effects of, and; on the output of the sample program. If a comma is used to separate PRINT operands, five fields are printed per printer line. If semicolon is used, up to twelve packed numeric fields are output per printer line (72 characters). Text in quotes is printed literally. Note: a variable name is considered as a simple expression by BASIC. For example, a statement for the first general form shown above might be: 100 PRINT A1, B2, C3 or 110 PRINT A, Z, X, T9 where the variables represent numeric expressions. Remember that variable values must be defined in an assignment, INPUT, READ or FOR statement before being used in a PRINT statement. Ending a PRINT statement with a semicolon causes the output to be printed on the same line, rather than generating a return linefeed after the statement is executed. For example, the sequence: 20 LET X = 1 30 print x; 40 let x=x+1 50 go to 30 . . produces output in this format: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1213 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Similarly, ending a PRINT statement with a comma causes output to fill all five fields on a line before moving to the next line. The trailing comma in statement 30 in the sequence: 20 LET X = 1 30 print x, 40 let x=x+1 50 go to 30 . . . produces output in this format: 1 2 3 4 56 7 8 9 1011 12 13 14 15 A print statement without an operand (statements 70 and 80 in the sample program) generates a return linefeed. GO TO AND MULTIBRANCH GO TOExamples: 10 LET X = 20 . . . 40 GO TO X+Y OF 410,420,430 50 GOTO 100 80 GOTO 10 90 GO TO N OF 100,150,180,190General Form:statement number GO TO statement numberstatement number GO TO expression OF sequence of statement numbers

Purpose

Go to transfers control to the statement specified. Go to expression...rounds the expression to an integer n and transfers control to the nth statement number following OF.

Comments

Go to may be written: GOTO or GO TO. must be followed by the statement number to which control is transferred, or expression OF, and a sequence of statement numbers. Go to overrides the normal execution sequence of statements in a program. If there is no statement number corresponding to the value of the expression, the GO TO is ignored. Useful for repeating a task infinitely, or jumping (GOing TO) another part of a program if certain conditions are present. Go to should not be used to enter FOR-NEXT loops; doing so may produce unpredictable results or fatal errors. GOSUB...RETURNExample: 50 READ A2 60 IF A2<100 THEN 80 70 GOSUB 400 . . . 380 STOP (STOP frequently precedes the first statement of - a subroutine, to prevent accidental entry.) 390 REM--THIS SUBROUTINE ASKS FOR A 1 OR 0 REPLY. 400 PRINT "A2 IS>100" 410 PRINT "DO YOU WANT TO CONTINUE"; 420 INPUT N 430 IF N #0 THEN 450 440 LET A2 = 0 450 RETURN . . . 600 ENDGeneral Form: statement number GOSUB statement number starting subroutine . . . statement number RETURN

Purpose

Gosub transfers control to the specified statement number. Return transfers control to the statement following the GOSUB statement which transferred control. Gosub...return eliminates the need to repeat frequently used groups of statements in a program. MULTIBRANCH GOSUBExamples: 20 GOSUB 3 OF 100,200,300,400,500 60 GOSUB N+1 OF 200,210,220 70 GOSUB N OF 80,180,280,380,480,580General Form:statement number GOSUB expression OF sequence of statement numbers . . .

Purpose

Gosub espression rounds the expression to an integer n and transfers control to the nth statement number following OF.

Comments

Subroutines should be exited only with a RETURN statement. The expression indicates which of the specified subroutines will be executed. For example, statement 20, above transfers control to the subroutine beginning with statement 300. The expression specifies which statement in the sequence of five statements is used as the starting one in the subroutine. The expression is evaluated as an integer. Non-integer values are rounded to the nearest integer. If the expression evaluates to a number greater than the number of statements specified, or less than 1, the GOSUB is ignored. Statement numbers in the sequence following OF must be separated by commas. IF...THENSample Program: 10 LET N = 10 20 READ X 30 IF X <=N THEN 60 40 PRINT "X IS OVER"; N 50 GO TO 100 60 PRINT "X IS LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO"; N 70 GO TO 20 80 STOP . . .General Form:statement number IF expression relational op expression THEN statementnumber

Purpose

Transfers control to a specified statement if a specified condition is true.

Comments

Sometimes described as a conditional transfer; GO TO is implied by IF...THEN, if the condition is true. In the example above, if X<=10, the message in statement 60 is printed (statement 60 is executed). Since numbers are not always represented exactly in the computer, the = operator should be used carefully in IF...THEN statements. Limits, such as <=,>=, etc. should be used in an IF expression, rather than =, whenever possible. If the specified condition for transfer is not true, the program will continue executing in sequence. In the example above, if X>10, the message in statement 40 prints. The relational operator is optional in logical evaluations. See Section V, Logical Operations, for a more complete description of logical evaluation. FOR...NEXT Examples: 100 FOR P1 = 1 TO 5 110 FOR Q1 = N TO X 120 FOR R2 = N TO X STEP 2.5 130 FOR S = 1 TO X STEP Y 140 NEXT S 150 NEXT R2 160 NEXT Q1 170 NEXT P1 Sample Program - Variable Number Of Loops 40 PRINT "HOW MANY TIMES DO YOU WAT TO LOOP"; 50 INPUT A 60 FOR J = 1 TO A 70 PRINT "THIS IS LOOP"; J 80 READ N1, N2, N3 90 PRINT "THESE DATA ITEMS WERE READ:" N1; N2; N3 100 PRINT "SUM ="; (N1+N2+N3) 110 NEXT J 120 DATA 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 130 DATA 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21 140 DATA 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30 150 DATA 31, 32, 33, 34 160 ENDGeneral Form:statement number FOR simple variable = initial value TO final valueorstatement no. FOR simple var. = initial value TO final value STEP stepvalue..statement number NEXT simple variableNOTE: The same simple variable must be used in both the FOR and NEXT state- ments of a loop.

Purpose

Allows controlled repetition of a group of statements within a program.

Comments

Initial value, final value and step value may be any expression. STEP and step value are optional; if no step value is specified, the computer will automatically increment by one each time it executes the loop. How the loop works: The simple variable is assigned the value of the initial value; the value of the simple variable is increased by 1 (or by the step value) each time the loop executes. When the value of the simple variable passes the final value, control is transferred to the statement following the NEXT statement. The initial, final, and step values are all evaluated upon entry to the loop and remain unchanged after entry. For example, FOR I = 1 TO I + 5 goes from 1 to 6; that is, the final value does not move as I increases with each pass through the loop. For further details on the STEP feature, see FOR...NEXT with STEP in Section III. try running the sample program if you are not sure what happens when FOR...NEXT loops are used in a program.

NESTING FOR...NEXT LOOPS

Several FOR...NEXT loops may be used in the same program; they may also be nested (placed inside one another). There are two important features of FOR...NEXT loops: 1. FOR...NEXT loops may be nested. ##STR14##2. The range of FOR...NEXT loops may not overlap. The loops in the example above are nested correctly. This example shows improper nesting. ##STR15##READ; DATA AND RESTORESample Program using READ and DATA15 FOR I=1 TO 520 READ A ##STR16##45 PRINT A;"SQUARED =";X50 NEXT I55 DATA 5.24,6.75,30.8,72.65,89.7260 END Each data item may be read only once in this program. TSB keeps track of data with a "pointer." When the first READ statement is encountered, the pointer indicates that the first item in the first DATA statement is to be read; the pointer is then moved to the second item of data, and so on. In this example, after the loop has executed five times, the pointer remains at the end of the data list. To reread the data, it is necessary to react the pointer. A RESTORE statement moves the pointer back to the first data item. Sample Program Using READ, DATA and RESTORE 20 FOR I=1 TO 5 30 READ A ##STR17## 50 PRINT A; "SQUARED =";X 60 NEXT I 80 RESTORE100 FOR J=1 TO 5110 READ B ##STR18##130 PRINT B; "TO READ FOR FOURTH POWER =";Y140 NEXT J150 DATA 5.24;6.75;30.8;72.65;89.72160 ENDGeneral Form:statement number READ variable , variable , . . .statement number DATA number or string , number or string , . . .statement number RESTOREstatement number RESTORE statement number

Purpose

The READ statement instructs TSB to read an item from a DATA statement. The DATA statement is used for specifying data in a program. The data is read in sequence from first to last DATA statements, and from left to right within the DATA statement. The RESTORE statement resets the pointer to the first data item, allowing data to be re-read. Restore followed by a statement number resets the pointer to the first data item, beginning at the specified statement.

Comments

Read statements require at least one DATA statement in the same program. Items in a DATA statement must be separated by commas. String and numeric data may be mixed. Data statements may be placed anywhere in a program. The data items will be read in sequence as required. Data statements do not execute; they merely specify data. The RUN command automatically sets the pointer to the first data item. If you are not sure of the effects of READ, DATA, and RESTORE, try running the sample programs. WAITExample: 900 WAIT (1000) 990 WAIT (3000)General Form: statement number WAIT ( expression max. value of 32767 )

Purpose

Introduces delays into a program. WAIT causes the program to wait the specified number of milliseconds (maximum 32,767 milliseconds) before continuing execution.

Comments

The time delay produced by WAIT is not precisely the number of milliseconds specified because there is no provision to account for time elapsed during calculation or terminal-computer communication. One millisecond = 1/1000 second. TERM: ROUTINEDefined in Basic as: A sequence of program statements which produces a certain result.

Purpose

Routines are used for frequently performed operations, saving the programmer the work of defining an operation each time he uses it, and saving computer memory space.

Comments

A routine may also be called a program, subroutine, or sub-program. The task performed by a routine is defined by the programmer. TERM: STRINGDefined in Basic as: 0 to 255 printer characters enclosed by quotation marks (one line on a teleprinter terminal).

Comments

Sample strings: Any characters!?*/--- text 1234567... quotation marks may not be used within a string. Strings are used only in PRINT statements. The statement number PRINT, and quotation marks are not included in the 65 character count. Each statement may contain up to 72 characters. Maximum string length is 72 characters minus 6 characters for PRINT, two for the quotation marks, and the number of characters in the statement number. TERM: FUNCTIONDefined in Basic as: The mathematical relationship between two variables (X and Y, for example) such that for each value of X there is one and only one value of Y.

Comments

The independent variable in a function is called an argument; the dependent variable is the function value. For instance, if X is the argument, the function value is the square root of X, and Y takes the value of the function. TERM: ARRAY OR MATRIXDefined in Basic as: An ordered collection of numeric data (numbers).

Comments

Arrays are divided into columns (vertical) and rows (horizontal): C ROWS O L U M N S Arrays may have one or two dimensions. For example, 1.0 2.1 3.2 4.3 is a one-dimensional array, while 6, 5, 4 3, 2, 1 0, 9, 8 is a two-dimensional array. Array elements are referenced by their row and column position For instance, if the two examples above were arrays A and Z respectively, 2.1 would be A(2); similarly, 0 would be Z(3,1). The references to array elements are called subscripts, and set apart with parentheses. For example, P(1,5) references the fifth element of the first row of array P; 1 and 5 are the subscripts. In X(M,N) M and N are the subscripts. TERM: WORDDefined in Basic as: The amount of computer memory space occupied by two teleprinter characters.

Comments

Numbers require two words of memory space when stored as numbers. When used within a string, numbers require one-half word of space per character in the number.

SUBROUTINES AND FUNCTIONS

The following pages explain BASIC features useful for repetitive operations -- subroutines, programmer-defined functions and standard functions. The programmer-defined features, such as GOSUB, FOR...NEXT with STEP, and DEF FN become more useful as the user gains experience and learns to use them as shortcuts. Standard mathematical and trigonometric functions are convenient timesavers for programmers at any level. They are treated as numeric expressions by BASIC. FOR...NEXT WITH STEPExamples: 20 FOR 15 = 1 TO 20 STEP 2 40 FOR N2 = 0 TO -10 STEP -2 80 FOR P = 1 TO N STEP X5 ##STR19##General Form:statement no. FOR simple var. = expression TO expression STEP expression

Purpose

Allows the user to specify the size of the increment of the FOR variable.

Comments

The step size need not be an integer. For instance, 100 FOR N = 1 TO 2 STEP .01 is a valud statement which produces approximately 100 loop executions, incrementing N by .01 each time. A step size of 1 is assumed if STEP is omitted from a FOR statement. A negative step size may be used, as shown in statement 40 above. GENERAL MATHEMATICAL FUNCTIONSExamples: 642 PRINT EXP(N); ABS(N) 652 IF RND (0)>= .5 THEN 900 662 IF INT (R) # 5 THEN 910 672 PRINT SQR (X); LOG (X)General Form: The general mathematical functions may be used as expressions, or as parts of an expression.

Purpose

Facilitates the use of common mathematical functions by pre-defining them as: Abs (expression) the absolute value of the expression; Exp (expression) the constant e raised to the power of the expression value (in statement 642 above, e.uparw.N) Int (expression) the largest integer .ltoreq. the expression; Log (expression) the logarithm of the positively valued expression to the base e; Rnd (expression) a random number between 1 and 0; the expression is a dummy argument; Sqr (expression) the square root of the positively valued expression.

Comments

The RND function is restartable; the sequence of random numbers using RND is identical each time a program is RUN. TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTIONSExamples: 500 PRINT SIN(X); COS(Y) 510 PRINT 3*SIN(B); TAN (C2) 520 PRINT ATN (22.3) 530 IF SIN (A2) <1 THEN 800 540 IF SIN (B3) = 1 AND SIN(X) <1 THEN 90

Purpose

Facilitates the use of common trigonometric functions by pre-defining them, as: Sin (expression) the sine of the expression Cos (expression) the cosine of the expression Tan (expression) the tangent of the expression Atn (expression) the arctangent of the expression

Comments

The function is of the value of the expression (the value in parentheses, also called the argument). The trigonometric functions may be used as expressions or parts of an expression. The angle of the trigonometric functions can be specified as radians, degrees, or grads by executing a RAD, DEG, or GRAD statement. The calculator assumes radians if not specified. THE TAB AND SGN FUNCTIONSExamples: 500 IF SGN (X) # 0 THEN 800 510 LET Y = SGN(X) 520 PRINT TAB (5); A2; TAB (20)"TEXT" 530 PRINT TAB (N),X,Y,Z2 540 PRINT TAB (X+2) "HEADING"; R5General Form: The TAB and SGN may be used as expressions, or parts of an expression. The function forms are:TAB (expression indicating number of spaces to be moved)SGN (expression)

Purpose

Tab (expression) is used only in a PRINT statement, and causes the terminal typeface to move to the space number specified by the expression (0 to 71). The expression value after TAB is rounded to the nearest integer. Expression values greater that 71 cause a return linefeed to be generated. Sgn (expression) returns a 1 if the expression is greater than 0, returns a 0 if the expression equals 0, returns a -1 if the expression is less than 0.

SECTION IV

MATRICES

This section explains matrix manipulation. It is intended to show the matrix capabilities of BASIC and assumes that the programmer has some knowledge of matrix theory. TERM: MATRIX (ARRAY)Defined in Basic as: An ordered collection of numeric data (numbers). Matrix elements are referenced by subscripts following the matrix variable, indicating the row and column of the element. For example, if matrix A is: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 the element 5 is referenced by A(2,2); likewise, 8 is A(3,2). see Section III, Vocabulary for a more complete description of matrices DIMExamples: 110 DIM A (50), B(20,20) 120 DIM Z (5,20) 130 DIM S (5,25) 140 DIM R (4,4)General Form:statement number DIM matrix variable ( integer ) . . .orstatement number DIM matrix variable ( integer , integer ) . . .

Purpose

Reserves working space in memory for a matrix. The maximum integer value (matrix bound) is 255.

Comments

The integers refer to the number of matrix elements if only one dimension is supplied, or to the number of rows and columns respectively, if two dimensions are given. A matrix (array) variable is any single letter from A to Z. arrays not mentioned in a DIM statement are assumed to have 10 elements if one-dimensional, or 10 rows and columns if two-dimensional. The working size of a matrix may be smaller than its physical size. For example, an array declared 9 .times. 9 in a DIM statement may be used to store fewer than 81 elements; the DIM statement supplies only an upper bound on the number of elements. The absolute maximum matrix size depends on the memory size of the computer. MAT...ZERExamples: 305 MAT A = ZER 310 MAT Z = ZER (N) 315 MAT X = ZER (30, 10) 320 MAT R = ZER (N, P)General Form:statement number MAT matrix variable = ZERorstatement number MAT matrix variable = ZER ( expression )orstatement number MAT matrix variable = ZER (expression , expression )

Purpose

Sets all elements of the specified matrix equal to 0; a new working size may be established.

Comments

The new working size in a MAT...ZER is an implicit DIM statement, and may not exceed the limit set by the DIM statement on the total number of elements in an array. Since 0 has a logical value of false, MAT...ZER is useful in logical initialization. MAT...CONExamples: 205 MAT C = CON 210 MAT A = CON (N,N) 220 MAT Z = CON (5,20) 230 MAT Y = CON (50)General Form:statement number MAT matrix variable = CONorstatement number MAT matrix variable = CON ( expression )orstatement number MAT matrix variable = CON (expression , expression )

Purpose

Sets up a matrix with all elements equal to 1; a new working size may be specified, within the limits of the original DIM statement on the total number of elements.

Comments

The new working size (an implicit DIM statement) may be omitted as in example statement 205. Note that since 1 has a logical value of true, the MAT...CON statement is useful for logical initialization. The expressions in new size specificatons should evaluate to integers. Non-integers are rounded to the nearest integer value. PRINTING SINGLE MATRIX ELEMENTSExamples: 800 PRINT A(3) 810 PRINT A(3,3); - 820 PRINT F(X);E; C5;R(N) 830 PRINT G(X,Y) 840 PRINT Z(X,Y), Z(1,5), Z(X+N), Z(Y+M)General Form:statement number PRINT matrix variable (expression ) . . .orstatement number PRINT matrix variable ( expression, expression ) . . .

Purpose

Causes the specified matrix element(s) to be printed.

Comments

Expressions used as subscripts should evaluate to integers. Non-integers are rounded to the nearest integer value. A trailing semicolon packs output into twelve elements per teleprinter line, if possible (statement 810 above). A trailing comma or return prints five elements per line. Expressions (or subscripts) following the matrix variable designate the row and column of the matrix element. Do not confuse these with new working size specifications, such as those following a MAT IDN statement. INPUTTING SINGLE MATRIX ELEMENTSExamples: 600 INPUT A(5) 610 INPUT B(5,8) - 620 INPUT R(X), N, A(3,3),S,T 630 INPUT Z(X,Y), P3, W 640 INPUT Z(X,Y), Z(X+1,Y+1), Z(X+R3,Y+S2)General Form:statement number INPUT matrix variable (expression ) . . .orstatement number INPUT matrix variable ( expression, expression ) . . .

Purpose

Allows input of a specified matrix element from the keyboard.

Comments

The subscripts (in expressions) used after the matrix variable designate the row and column of the matrix element. Do not confuse these expressions with working size specifications, such as those following a MAT READ statement. Expression used as subscripts should evaluate to integers. Non-integers are rounded to the nearest integer value. Inputting, printing, and reading individual array elements are logically equivalent to simple variables and may be intermixed in INPUT, PRINT, and READ statements. MAT PRINTExamples: 500 MAT PRINT A 505 MAT PRINT A; 515 MAT PRINT A,B,C 520 MAT PRINT A,B,C;General Form:statement number MAT PRINT matrix variable orstatement number MAT PRINT matrix variable, matrix variable . . .

Purpose

Causes an entire matrix to be printed, row by row, with double spacing between rows.

Comments

Matrices may be printed in packed rows up to 12 elements wide by using the ; separator, as in example statement 505. READING MATRIX ELEMENTSEXAMPLES: 900 READ A(6) 910 READ A(9,9) 920 READ C(X); P; R7 930 READ C(X,Y) 940 READ Z(X,Y), P(R2, S5), X(4)General Form:statement number READ matrix variable (expression) orstatement number READ matrix variable (expression, expression) . . .

Purpose

Causes the specified matrix element to be read from the current DATA statement.

Comments

Expressions (used as subscripts) should evaluate to integers. Non-integers are rounded to the nearest integer. Expressions following the matrix variable designate the row and column of the matrix element. Do not confuse these with working size specifications, such as those following MAT READ statement. The MAT READ statement is used to read an entire matrix from DATA statements. See details in this section. MAT READExamples: 350 MAT READ A 370 MAT READ B(5),C,D 380 MAT READ Z (5,8) 390 MAT READ N (P3,Q/)General Form:statement number MAT READ matrix variable orstatement number MAT READ matrix variable (expression) . . . orstatement number MAT READ matrix variable (expression, expression) . . .

Purpose

Reads an entire matrix from DATA statements. A new workking size may be specified, within the limits of the original DIM statement.

Comments

Mat read causes the entire matrix to be filled from the current DATA statement in the row, column order 1,1; 1,2; 1,3; etc. In this case, the DIM statement controls the number of elements read. MATRIX ADDITIONExamples: 310 MAT C = B + A 320 MAT X = X + Y 330 MAT P = N + MGeneral Form:statement number MAT matrix variable = matrix variable + matrix variable

Purpose

Establishes a matrix equal to the sum of two matrices of identical dimensions; addition is performed element-by-element.

Comments

The resulting matrix must be previously mentioned in a DIM statement if it has more than 10 elements, or 10 .times. 10 elements if two-dimensional. Dimensions must be the same as the operand matrices. The same matrix may appear on both sides of the = sign, as in example statement 320. MATRIX SUBTRACTIONExamples: 550 MAT C = A - B 560 MAT B = B - Z 570 MAT X = X - AGeneral Form:statement number MAT matrix variable = matrix variable - matrix variable

Purpose

Establishes a matrix equal to the difference of two matrices of identical dimensions; subtraction is performed element-by-element.

Comments

The resulting matrix must be previously mentioned in a DIM statement if it has more than 10 elements, or 10 .times. 10 elements if two-dimensional. Its dimension must be the same as the operand matrices. The same matrix may appear on both sides of the = sign, as in example statement 560. MATRIX MULTIPLICATIONExamples: 930 MAT Z = B * C 940 MAT X = A * A 950 MAT C = Z * BGeneral Form:statement number MAT matrix variable = matrix variable * matrix variable

Purpose

Establishes a matrix equal to the product of the two specified matrices.

Comments

Following the rules of matrix multiplication, if the dimensions of matrix B = (P,N) and matrix C = (N,Q), multiplying matrix B by matrix C results in a matrix of dimensions (P,Q). note that the product matrix must have an appropriate working size. The same matrix variable may not appear on both sides of the = sign. SCALAR MULTIPLICATIONExamples: 110 MAT A = (5) * B 115 MAT C = (10) * C 120 MAT C = (N/3) * X 130 MAT P = (Q7*N5) * RGeneral Form:statement number MAT matrix variable = (expression) * matrix variable

Purpose

Establishes a matrix equal to the product of a matrix multiplied by a specified expression (number); that is, each element of the original matrix is multiplied by the number.

Comments

The resulting matrix must be previously mentioned in a DIM statement if it contains more than 10 elements (10 .times. 10 if two-dimensional). The same matrix variable may appear on both sides of the = sign. Both matrices must have the same working size. COPYING A MATRIXExamples: 405 MAT B = A 410 MAT X = Y 420 MAT Z = BGeneral Form:statement number MAT variable = matrix variable

Purpose

Copies a specified matrix into a matrix of the same dimensions; copying is performed element-by-element.

Comments

The resulting matrix must be previously mentioned in a DIM statement if it has more than 10 elements, or 10 .times. 10 if two-dimensional. It must have the same dimensions as the copied matrix. IDENTITY MATRIXExamples: 205 MAT A = IDN 210 MAT B = IDN (3,3) 215 MAT Z = IDN (Q5, Q5) 220 MAT S = IDN (6, 6)General Form:statement number MAT array variable = IDNorstatement number MAT array variable = IDN (expression, expression)

Purpose

Establishes an identity matrix (all 0's, with a diagonal from left to right of all 1's); a new working size may be specified.

Comments

The IDN matrix must be two-dimensional and square. Specifying a new working size has the effect of a DIM statement. Sample identity matrix: 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 MATRIX TRANSPOSITIONExamples: 959 MAT Z = TRN (A) 969 MAT X = TRN (B) 979 MAT Z = TRN (C)General Form:statement number MAT matrix variable = TRN (matrix variable)

Purpose

Establishes a matrix as the transposition of a specified matrix (transposes rows and columns).

Comments

Sample transposition: ______________________________________Original Transposed______________________________________1 2 3 1 4 74 5 6 2 5 87 8 9 3 6 9______________________________________ Note that the dimensions of the resulting matrix must be the reverse of the original matrix. For instance, if A has dimensions of 6,5 and MAT C = TRN (A), C must have dimensions of 5,6. Matrices cannot be transposed or inverted into themselves. MATRIX INVERSIONExamples: 380 MAT A = INV(B) 390 MAT C = INV(A) 400 MAT Z = INV(Z)General Form:statement number MAT matrix variable = INV (matrix variable)

Purpose

Establishes a square matrix as the inverse of the specified square matrix of the same dimensions.

Comments

The inverse is the matrix by which you multiply the original matrix to obtain an identity matrix. For example, ______________________________________Original Inverse Indentity______________________________________100 100 100110 .times. -110 = 010-111 0-11 0O1______________________________________ Number representaton in BASIC is accurate to 6-7 decimal digits; matrix elements are rounded accordingly.

SECTION V

LOGICAL OPERATIONS

LOGICAL VALUES AND NUMERIC VALUES

A distinction should be made between logical values and the numeric values produced by logical evaluation, when using the logical capability of BASIC. the logical value of an expression is determined by definitions established in the user's program. The numeric values produced by logical evaluation are assigned by BASIC. The user may not assign these values. ;8c Logical value is the value of an expression or statement, using the criteria: any nonzero expression value = true any expression value of zero = false When an expression or statement is logically evaluated, it is assigned one of two numeric values, either: 1, meaning the expression or statement is true, or 0, meaning the expression or statement is false.

RELATIONAL OPERATORS

There are two ways to use the relational operators in logical evaluations: 1. As a simple check on the numeric value of an expression. Examples: 150 IF B=7 THEN 600 200 IF A9#27.65 THEN 700 300 IF (Z/10)>0 THEN 800 When a statement is evaluated, if the IF condition is currently true (for example, B = 7 in statement 150), then control is transferred to the specified statement; if it is not true, control passes to the next statement in the program. Note that the numeric value produced by the logical evaluation is unimportant when the relational operators are used in this way. The user is concerned only with the presence or absence of the condition indicated in the IF statement. 2. As a check on the numeric value produced by logically evaluating an expression, that is: true = 1, false = 0. Examples: 610 LET X=27 615 PRINT X=27 620 PRINT X#27 630 PRINT X>=27 The example PRINT statements give the numeric values produced by logical evaluation. For instance, statement 615 is interpreted by BASIC as "Print 1 if X equals 27, 0 if X does not equal 27." There are only two logical alternatives; 1 is used to represent true, and 0 false. The numeric value of the logical evaluation is dependent on, but distinct from, the value of the expression. In the example above, X equals 27, but the numeric value of the logical expression X=27 is 1 since it describes a true condition.

BOOLEAN OPERATORS

There are two ways to use the Boolean Operators. 1. As logical checks on the value of an expression or expressions. Examples: 510 IF A1 OR B THEN 670 520 IF B3 AND C9 THEN 680 530 IF NOT C9 THEN 690 540 IF X THEN 700 Statement 510 is interpreted: "If either A1 is true (has a non-zero value) or B is true (has a non-zero value), then transfer control to statement 670" Similarly, statement 540 is interpreted: "If X is true (has a non-zero value), then transfer control to statement 700." The Boolean operators evaluate expressions for their logical values only: these are true = any non-zero value, false = zero. For example, if B3 = 9 and C9 = -5, statement 520 would evaluate to true, since both B3 and C9 have a non-zero value. 2. As a check on the numeric value produced by logically evaluating an expression, that is: true = 1, false = 0. Examples: 490 LET B = C = 7 500 PRINT B AND C 510 PRINT C OR B 520 PRINT NOT B Statements 500 - 520 return a numeric value of either 1, indicating that the statement has a logical value of true, or 0, indicating a logical value of false. Note that the criteria for determining the logical values are: true = any non-zero expression value false = an expression value of 0. The numeric value 1 or 0 is assigned accordingly.

SECTION VI

SYNTAX REQUIREMENTS OF BASIC

Legend

::= "is defined as..." .vertline. "or" < > enclose an element of BASIC

Language Rules

1. The <com statement>, if any exists, must be the first statement presented and have the lowest sequence number; the last statement must be an <END statement>. 2. A sequence number may not exceed 9999 and must be non-zero. 3. Exponent integers may not have more than two digits. 4. A formal bound may not exceed 255 and must be non-zero. 5. A subroutine number must lie between 1 and 63, inclusive. 6. Strings may not contain the quote character ("). 7. A <bound part> for an IDN must be doubly subscripted. 8. An array may not be inverted or transposed into itself. 9. An array may not be replaced by itself multiplied by another array. __________________________________________________________________________SYNTAX REQUIREMENTS__________________________________________________________________________ <basic program> ##STR20##<program statement> ::= <sequence number> <basic statement> carriage return<sequence number> ::= <integer>.sup.(2) <basic statement> ##STR21##<let statement> ::= <let head> <formula> <let head> ##STR22## <formula> ##STR23## <conjunction> ##STR24## <boolean primary> ##STR25## <arithmetic expression> ##STR26## <term> ##STR27## <factor> ##STR28## <primary> ##STR29## <relational operator> ##STR30## <operand> ##STR31## <variable> ##STR32## <simple variable> ##STR33##<subscripted variable> ##STR34##<array dentifier> ::= <letter> <subscript head> ##STR35##<subscript> ::= <formula> <letter> ##STR36## <digit> ##STR37## <left bracet> ##STR38## <right bracket> ##STR39## <sign> ##STR40## <unsigned number > ##STR41## <decimal part> ##STR42## <integer> ##STR43## <exponent< ##STR44##<system function> ::= <system function name> <parameterpart> <system function name> ##STR45##<parameter part> ::= <left bracket> <actual parameter> <right bracket><actual parameter> ::= <formula><function> ::= FN <letter> <parameter part><formula operand> ::= <left bracket> <formula> <right bracket><dim statement> ::= DIM <formal array list> <formal array list> ##STR46##<formal array> ##STR47## <formal bound head> ##STR48##<formal bound> ::= <integer>.sup.(4)<com statement> ::= COM <formal array list><def statement> ##STR49##<formal parameter> ::= <simple variable><rem statement> ::= REM <character string><character string> ##STR50##<goto statement> ::= GO TO <sequence number><if statement> ::= IF <formula> THEN <sequence number> <for statement> ##STR51##<for head> ::= FOR <for variable>=<initial value> TO <limit value><for variable> ::= <simple variable><initial value> ::= <formula><limit value> ::= <formula><step size> ::= <formula><next statement> ::= NEXT <for variable><gosub statement ::= GOSUB <sequence number><return statement> ::= RETURN<end statement> ::= END<stop statement> ::= STOP<wait statement> ::= WAIT <parameter part><call statement> ::= CALL <call head> <right bracket> <call head> ##STR52##<subroutine number> ::= <integer>.sup.(5) <data statement> ##STR53## <contstant> ##STR54##<read statement> ::= READ <variable list> <variable list> ##STR55##<rstore statement> ::= RESTORE<input statement> ::= INPUT <variable list> <print statement> ##STR56## <print head> ##STR57##- <print part> ##STR58##<string> ::= "<character string>".sup.(6) <delimiter> ##STR59## <print formula> ##STR60##<mat statement> ::= MAT <mat body> <mat body> ##STR61## <mat read> ##STR62## <actual array> ##STR63##<bound part> ::= <actual bound hed> <actual bound> <right bracet> <actual bound head> ##STR64##<actual bound> ::= <formula><mat print> ##STR65## <mat print part> ##STR66##<mat replacement> ::= >array identifier>=<mat formula> <mat formula> ##STR67## <mat function> ##STR68## <mat initialization> ##STR69##<array parameter> ::= <left bracket> <array identifier> <right bracket>.sup.(8) <mat opeator> ##STR70##__________________________________________________________________________

STRINGS PLUG-IN READ-ONLY MEMORY MODULE

The strings plug-in read-only memory module makes available to the user all of the string variables functions and operations associated with standard BASIC programming language. Two additional functions not usually provided in most versions of BASIC language have been implemented. These include a POS function for determining the position of a substring within a string and a VAL function for determining the position of a substring within a string and a VAL function for determining the numeric value of a string. A discussion of these and other string functions and operations follows.

String

A set of 1 to 255 characters or the null string (no characters).

e.g. "ABCDEF" "12345" " " string Variable

A variable used to store strings; consists of a single letter (A to Z) followed by a $.

e.g. A$; B$; Z$ Substring Variable

A single character or a set of contiguous characters from within a string variable. The substring is defined by a subscripted string variable. A single subscript specifies the first character of the substring and implies that all characters following are part of the substring. Two subscripts specify the first and last characters of the substring.

e.g. A$ = "ABCDEF" A$(4) = def a$(1,3) = abc dim statement

General Form:

stmt # DIM string var (# chars in string)

Purpose:

Reserves storage space for strings longer than 1 character.

Comments:

The number of characters specified for a string in its DIM statement must be expressed as an integer from 1 to 255. Strings not mentioned in a DIM statement are assumed to have length 1. The length mentioned in the DIM statement specifies the maximum number of characters which may be assigned and is known as the physical length. The actual length is the actual number of characters which has been assigned.

e.g. DIM A$(10), B(5,5), B$(255) Source String Semantic Description

A source string is an entity from which a string value is extracted. If no substring designator is specified for a string variable, the value of the source string is the entire logical string currently assigned to it. Substring designator expressions must be at least 1 in value and the second may be no smaller than one less than the first. If one subscript is given, the value is the entire logical string beginning at the character specified by the subscript. The subscript may be no larger than the actual length of the string plus 1. If two substring expressions are given, the source string value is the substring whose first and last characters are designated. If the specified substring extends beyond the logical length of the string, spaces are used to fill out the substring.

Assignment Statement

General Form:

line # [LET] destination string = source string

Destination String:

A destination string is an entire string variable or part of a string variable into which a source string is to be copied. The definition of the action depends on the number of substring subscripts specified in the destination string.

If no subscript qualifier is specified, the entire destination variable is replaced by the source string. The physical length of the destination string must be large enough to accommodate the entire source string.

If one substring subscript is specified, the entire value of the destination variable, beginning at the designated character, is replaced by the source string. That part of the destination variable preceding the subscript value is unchanged. The subscript value must be no more than one greater than the actual length of the destination variable.

If two subscripts are specified, the first substring subscript must be no more than one greater than the logical length of the destination variable, and the second subscript must be no greater than the physical length of the destination variable. The specified section of the destination string is replaced by the source string. If the source string is longer than the destination, it is truncated on the right. If the source string is shorter, as many trailing blanks are appended as necessary. The new actual length of the destination string is the larger of the old actual length and the second subscript.

String Input Statement

General Form:

stmt # INPUT string or substring variable

Purpose:

Allows string values to be entered from the keyboard.

Comments:

Numeric variables may be used in the same input statement as string variables. Placing a single string variable in an input statement allows the string value to be entered without enclosing it in quotation marks. If multiple string variables are used each string value must be enclosed in quotation marks, and the values separated by commas.

e.g. 10 INPUT A$, B$, C, Al, A$(1,5) String Print Statement

General Form:

stmt # PRINT string or substring variable,

Purpose:

Causes the current value of the specified string or substring variable to be output on the standard output device.

Comments:

Strings and numeric values may be mixed in a print statement. Sring variables are specified identically to numeric variables. They are printed under the same format rules as quote fields. String and substring variables are printed as source strings.

A maximum of 72 characters can be printed using the print statement, i.e., all strings >72 characters are truncated at 72 characters.

String Read Statement

General Form:

stmt # READ string or substring variable

Purpose:

Causes the value of a specified string or substring variable to be read from a data statement.

Comments:

Mixed string and numeric values may be read. If the wrong data type is given in the data statement an error is given.

e.g. 10 READ A, B$(1, 10), C$, B String If Statement

General Form:

stmt # IF str.var. rel.oper. string THEN stmt #

Purpose:

Compares two strings. If the specified condition is true, control is transferred to the specified statement.

Comments:

Strings are compared one character at a time, from left to right; the first difference determines the relation. If one string ends before a difference is found, the shortest string is considered the smaller one.

Characters are compared by their ASCII representations.

The relational operators allowed are:

=, .noteq., <, >,<=, >=, <> e.g. 10 IF A$ = "SAM" THEN 20 String Data Statement

General Form:

stmt # DATA "string text", "string text",

Purpose:

Specifies data in a program (string or/and numeric)

Comments:

String values must be enclosed by quotation marks and separated by commas.

String and numeric values may be mixed in a single data statement.

e.g. 10 DATA "ABC", 1.2, "DEF" String Write Statement

General Form:

stmt # WRITE (device # , format stat # ) string or substring variable

Purpose:

Similar to the print statement but allows the specification of the output device and format statement. No field specifications are made for string variables in the format statement. They are treated identically to string constants (quote fields).

String Display Statement

General Form:

stmt # DISP string or substring variable

Purpose:

Identical to print statement except output device is 32 character display.

Len function

General Form:

Len string or Len (string) (string)

Purpose:

Obtain the length of a string for use in an arithmetic expression.

Comment:

The actual length is found which is not necessarily the same as the physical length reserved in the DIM statement.

e.g. LEN ("ABCD") = 4 Pos function

General Form:

POS string, string or POS (string, string)

Purpose:

Determine the position of a substring within a string.

Comments:

If the second string argument is a part of the first, the value of the function is the position in the first string at which the second string starts. If the second string in the argument is not a part of the first, the value of the function is zero.

e.g. POS ("ABCD" , "C") = 3 Val function

General Form:

VAL string or VAL (string)

Purpose:

Determine the numeric value of a string.

Comments:

The VAL function converts a string of digits into a number. The string is converted into a number by the same rules used in a numeric input statement.

e.g. VAL ("123") = 123

ERROR MESSAGES FOR STRING OPTION BLOCK

70 -- string IF error 71 -- string function syntax error 72 -- negative string length 73 -- non-contiguous string 74 -- string overflow 75 -- data is of wrong type 76 -- VAL function argument not numeric __________________________________________________________________________BNF SYNTAX DESCRIPTION__________________________________________________________________________<literal string> ::="<character string 22 "<character string> ::=<character> character string> <character><character> ::=any ASCII character except NULL, LINE FEED, RETURN<letter> ::=A B X Y Z<sublist> ::=expression> expression>,<expression><string variable> ::=<simple string variable> <simple string variable>(<sublist>)<simple string variable> ::=<letter>$21 relational operator> ::=<.vertline. s,6 <=.vertline. =.vertline. #.vertline . <>.vertline. >= ><assignment statement> ::= LET<destination string>=<source string> ` .vertline. <destination string>=<source string><destination string> ::=<string variable><source string> ::=<string variable>.vertline. <literal string><IF statement> ::= IF<destination string><relational operator><sourcestring> THEN<line number><data state,ment> ::= DATA<constant>.vertline. <data statement>, <constant><constant> ::=<numeric constant>.vertline. <literal string><read statement> ::= INPUT<varaible list><variable list> ::<read variable>.vertline. <variable list>, <read variable><read variable> ::=<numeric variable>.vertline. <string variable><input statement> ::= INPUT<variable list><print statement> ::=<print>.vertline. <print 2><print 1> ::= PRINT <print 2>,.vertline. <print 2>;.vertline. <print 3><print 2> ::=<print 1><print expression>.vertline. <print 3><print 3` ::=(type statement><literal string><print expression> ::=<expression>.vertline. <source string>WRITE and disp statements havethe same syntax as the PRINTstatement.<LEN function> ::= LEN<source string> LEN(<source string>)<VAL function> ::= s,1 VAL<source string> VAL(<source string>)<POS function> ::= POS<source string>,<source string>.vertline. POS(<source string>,<source string>)__________________________________________________________________________

EXTENDED INPUT/OUTPUT PLUG-IN READ-ONLY MEMORY MODULE

The extended I/O read-only memory module (hereinafter referred to as the extended I/O ROM) provides additional functions and statements so that the calculator can be made compatible with a wide variety of peripheral devices. Added functions include decimal-to-binary and octal-to-decimal conversion, status code inquiry for peripheral devices, control of spacing and line feeds in output records, and others. Use of these functions requires no special programming techniques; once the ROM is plugged in, its functions and statements become a part of the calculator, in the same way as, for example, the square root function is part of the calculator.

Some read-only memory units decrease the amount of programmable memory avilable to the user by automatically requiring a portion of that memory for their own internal usage, but the extended I/O ROM has no such requirement and does not affect memory availability.

The following table describes the extended I/O ROM functions and statements. Parameters shown underlined in the table are explained immediately following the table. Parameters shown in brackets may or may not be included as parts of a statement.

__________________________________________________________________________FUNCTION MNEMONIC DESCRIPTION OF FUNCTION SYNTAX__________________________________________________________________________BIN Converts decimal expression to its binary equivalent. For use in output-to-binary storage device; also provides increased control of print format.__________________________________________________________________________ BIN expOCT Converts octal expression to decimal equivalent. For use in construction of code conversion tables; see "-Conversion Tables".__________________________________________________________________________ OCT exp STAT Returns code of operational status (on, off, wait, etc.) for the device specified by the select code.__________________________________________________________________________ STAT select code CHAR Returns one byte of data from the device specified by the select code regardless of the data structure.__________________________________________________________________________ CHAR mr,1 select codeLIN Advances printer or typewriter the number of lines represented by the expression.__________________________________________________________________________ LIN expSPA Advances printer or typewriter carriage the number of spaces represented by the expression.__________________________________________________________________________ SPA expROT Converts expression 1 to binary equivalent; performs rotation right the number of positions represented by expression 2; returns decimal equivalent. For use in special input or output code translation.__________________________________________________________________________ ROT (exp 1, exp 2) INOR Combines binary equivalents of expression 1 and expression 2 in an "inclusive or" logic operation. Returns decimal equivalent. For use in special input or output code translation.__________________________________________________________________________ INOR (exp 1, exp 2)BIAND Combines binary equivalents of expression 1 and expression 2 in an "and" logic operation. Returns decimal equivalent. For use in special input or output translation.__________________________________________________________________________ BIAND (exp 1, exp 2)STATEMENT SYNTAX DESCRIPTION OF STATEMENT__________________________________________________________________________ ##STR71## Inputs data frm named device or string with optional conversion to ASCII code; includes capability for__________________________________________________________________________ iteration. ##STR72## Outputs data to named device or string with optional conversion to ASCII code.__________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________PARAMATER EXPLANATION__________________________________________________________________________exp Expressionselect code A numeric code, from 1 to 15, uniquely representing the input or output device, as follows: select code 1-9 User assignable. select code 10 Cassette Memory. select code 11-13 reserved. select code 14 Plotter. select code 15 Typewriter or Printer.string name A single letter followed by a "$". Valid only when String ROM is also plugged in.format To reference a FORMAT statement, the line number of that statement is shown; for free-form data, an asterisk (*) is shown.conversion table The variable or array name given to a conversion table. See heading "Conversion Tables".list A list of variables, literals, expressions or numerics separated by commas.FOR functions To input multiple data items from one record into an array. Syntax as follows: ##STR73##__________________________________________________________________________

CONVERSION TABLES

Using a pre-established conversion table, a string of characters or an array of data can be converted from one code to another. The calculator makes use of standard ASCII* codes. Let us refer to all non-ASCII representation codes used by printers, card readers, paper tape readers, punches, typewriters, etc. as foreign codes.

* American Standard Code for Information Interchange.

A conversion table is defined in the BASIC language program DIM statement. Only single-dimensioned integer arrays are considered valid for use as conversion tables. In the following DIM statements, A and B are valid array structures for conversion tables, but C, D, and E are not.

Dim ai (150), ci(20, 30) dim bi (80), d(200), e(15, 15)

in order to insert conversion table information in the array, the foreign code must first be known. Suppose your paper tape reader uses EIA** coded tape. The chart following shows symbols and the equivalent tape punches for EIA code, with the octal code equivalent for each symbol.

** Electronic Industries Association Standard Code. ##SPC1##

The following chart shows the ASCII symbols with their octal code equivalents.

______________________________________ ASCII EquivalentSymbol (octal) code)______________________________________(Space) 040! 041# 043$ 044% 045& 046' 047( 050) 051* 052+ 053, 054- 055. 056/ 0570 0601 0612 0623 0634 0645 0656 0667 0678 0709 071: 072; 073< 074= 075> 076? 077O.sub.a 100A 101B 102C 103D 104E 105F 106G 107H 110I 111J 112K 113L 114M 115N 117O 117P 120Q 121R 122S 123T 124U 125V 126W 127X 130Y 131Z 132[ 133 134] 135______________________________________

The following chart shows the information to be programmed into the conversion table.

__________________________________________________________________________ EIA ASCII EIA EIA ASCIISymbol (octal equiv) (octal equiv) Symbol (octal equiv) (octal equiv)__________________________________________________________________________Sp 020 040 A 141 101! 041 B 142 102.andgate. 043 C 163 103$ 045 E 165 105& 046 F 166 106' 047 G 147 107 H 150 110( 050 I 171 111) 051 J 121 112* 052 K 122 113+ 053 L 103 114, 073 054 M 124 115- 100 055 N 105 116. 153 056 0 106 117/ 061 057 P 127 120 Q 130 1210 040 060 R 111 1221 001 061 S 62 1232 002 062 T 43 1243 023 063 U 64 1254 004 064 V 45 1265 025 065 W 46 1276 026 066 X 67 1307 007 067 Y 70 1318 010 070 Z 51 1329 031 071 [: 072 133; 073 ] 134< 074 135= 075> 076? 077O.sub.a 100C+RR 200 012__________________________________________________________________________

The conversion table portion of a BASIC program is shown on the chart below. Each statement defines one element in the conversion Table A with the use of the OCT function: the octal notation does not need to be translated to decimal. If decimal notation was supplied in the symbol tables, the OCT function could have been omitted; however, it is common to obtain symbol tables in the octal form rather than in decimal form.

10 DIM AI[128] 20 a[oct20]=oct40 30 a[oct73]=oct54 40 a[oct100]=oct55 50 a[oct153]=oct56 60 a[oct61]=oct57 70 a[oct40]=oct60 80 a[oct1]=oct61 90 a[oct2]=oct62 100 a[oct23]=oct63 110 a[oct4]=oct64 120 a[oct25]=oct65 130 a[oct26]=oct66 140 a[oct7]=oct67 150 a[oct10]=oct70 160 a[oct31]=oct71 170 a[oct200]=oct12 180 a[oct141]=oct101 190 a[oct142]=oct102 200 a[oct163]=oct103 210 a[oct144]=oct104 220 a[oct165]=oct105 230 a[oct166]=oct106 240 a[oct147]=oct107 250 a[oct150]=oct110 260 a[oct171]=oct111 270 a[oct121]=oct112 280 a[oct122]=oct113 290 a[oct103]=oct114 a[oct124]=oct115 310 a[oct105]=oct116 320 a[oct106]=oct117 330 a[oct127]=oct120 340 a[oct130]=oct121 350 a[oct111]=oct122 360 a[oct62]=oct123 370 a[oct43]=oct124 380 a[oct64]=oct125 390 a[oct45]=oct126 400 a[oct46]=oct127 410 a[oct67]=oct130 420 a[oct70]=oct131 430 a[oct51]=oct132 enter

when a CHAR request is keyed into the calculator for the paper tape reader, conversion is not done and the calculator will display the decimal equivalent of the EIA octal code for the symbol taken from the paper tape. In order to have automatic code conversion, the program must contain an ENTER statement.

410 ENTER (9, 420, A) B B will be read and its ASCII equivalent found in the conversion table A. If data contained in a string is to be converted to ASCII code, the string name is used instead of the select code, and in this way conversion can be done internally as well as at time of input or output. Output

for output of data in a foreign code, automatic code conversion is invoked by use of the OUTPUT statement.

500 OUTPUT (8, 510, A) B The ASCII B will be found in the conversion table A and changed to the foreign code equivalent before output. Notice that the same conversion table A is used for input and output. The ENTER statement causes the calculator to look for ASCII code, (on the right of the equals (=) signs in the table), and assume that it is receiving foreign code; whereas the OUTPUT statement causes the calculator to assume it has ASCII code, and to look for the fogeign code (on the left of the equals (=) signs in the table above. Error codes

program diagnostic or error conditions found in the Extended I/O ROM:

______________________________________NUMBER EXPLANATION______________________________________ERROR 83 End of data reached or data contains more than ten (10) blanks in a row.ERROR 84 Invalid format specification: format must be free format (*), E format or F format.ERROR 85 Numeric input syntax error: multiple decimal points, more than one E in E format, etc.ERROR 86 Conversion table not found. Check for integer initialization in DIM statement.______________________________________

TERMINAL PLUG-IN READ-ONLY MEMORY MODULE

The terminal plug-in read-only memory module that is available with the calculator allows the user to enter, store, and edit free-text. It also allows the user to communicate, either directly or through an external modem, with another calculator, a computer or a time-sharing computer system. The calculator may transmit or receive BASIC language programs or free-text.

To put the calculator into terminal mode, the user types in TERM and actuates the EXECUTE key. If he wants to use the calculator for data transmission, he can specify one or two optional parameters following the TERM mnemonic. The first parameter is the select code of the modem interface module. If another select code is not specified the calculator assumes select code four. The second parameter is the baud rate of the transmitted data. If not specified, the calculator will assume 110 baud which is the same rate as a standard ASR232 teletypewriter. For example, to transmit or receive on select code six at 300 baud, the user enters TERM, 6,300 followed by actuation of the EXECUTE key. The selectable baud rate is continuous in integer increments from 3 to 300. The conversion of characters from parallel to serial format is done automatically within the calculator firmware, so the modem interface circuitry is simplified and no switches are required to change baud rate.

While the calculator is operating in the terminal mode, lines of text may be entered from the keyboard terminated with the END-OF-LINE key. These lines must be preceded by a line number, but there is no syntax requirement for the remainder of the line. All of the line-by-line and character-by-character editing features of the calculator are available in this mode. These include listing, backspace, forward space, insert character, delete character, and display shift control. Automatic line numbering is also available. In addition, the tape cassette commands, the PTAPE command, the PRINT ALL command, and the LIST command operate normally. The LIST command syntax has been expanded to include LISTX, which means list without line numbers, as well as LIST#SC or LISTX#SC where SC is the select code of the modem interface, which means transmit the information through the modem to the remote system.

When the calculator is operating in the terminal mode, five of the user-definable keys take on special meaning. Key f5 becomes a teletype shift key and f6 becomes a teletype control key. These keys and the lower case shift key allow the user to generate any seven-bit ASCII code. To generate a teletype shift or control character, the user first actuates the f5 or f6 keys and then actuates the appropriate key on the alpha section of the keyboard. For example, to generate a control C, the f6 key and the C key are actuated sequentially. No character is entered into the display until after the chosen alpha key is actuated. The character entered into the display may or may not be the same as the alpha character. For instance a shift O generates the symbol .

Key f8 is used in the terminal mode to select even or odd parity for transmitted characters. When the terminal mode is first entered, even parity is assumed. The user may then convert to odd parity by actuating key f8. The display will then indicate ODD. To revert back to even parity the user actuates key f8 again, and the display indicates EVEN.

Key f9 is used in the terminal mode as a transmit key. To transmit a message through the modem interface, the message is typed into the display from the keyboard, and then the line is terminated by actuating key f9. The calculator then serializes the characters entered, and transmits them at the selected baud rate. For example, to obtain a listing of a program from a remote time-sharing computer service, the user enters LIST f9. The transmit key may also be used to enter the responses in a sign-on procedure for a time-sharing service.

Key f7 is used to place the calculator into a mode for saving, in memory, an incoming program. For example, to receive and store a program from a time-sharing computer service, the user actuates key f7 followed by LIST f9. As the program is listed from the time-sharing service, the lines are stored in the calculator's user memory as free-text. If the f7 key is not actuated just prior to entering LIST f9, the program will be printed on the external line printer.

Once a program has been entered as free-text, either from a remote source or from the keyboard, and if it is a BASIC program, it may be checked for syntax errors and converted to BASIC program format in memory. This is done by typing COMP followed by actuation of the EXECUTE key. Any syntax errors will be listed, and only the lines which have correct BASIC syntax will be translated. Incorrect lines will remain in free-text format. After a program has been translated by the COMP command, it may be executed locally using any of the normal execution commands, i.e. RUN, CONT, etc. An attempt to execute an untranslated line will cause an error message (ERROR 79) to be displayed.

The receiving section of the modem driver routine operates under interrupt control which allows the user to execute programs locally and remotely at the same time. For example, the user may want to run a program on a time-sharing computer system that may take several minutes to complete. He may start that program by transmitting a RUN command. While that program is being executed, the calculator is free for normal keyboard operation or program execution. The only limitation in the mode is that the calculator may not use the display or printer at this same time as it is receiving information from the remote program.

PLOTTER PLUG-IN READ-ONLY MEMORY MODULE

The plotter plug-in read-only memory module enables the calculator to control an Hewlett-Packard 9862A calculator plotter, providing permanent graphic solutions to problems solved by the calculator.

In general, the plotter command set can be considered as consisting of two groups: plotting commands and writing commands. The user can specify any plotting units he pleases, the calculator then automatically scales those units to fit the chosen plotting area. Also, the calculator keyboard characters can be drawn in different sizes and directions.

The plotting commands enable the system to automatically scale user-units; draw X and Y axes of any length, anywhere in the plotting area; make any desired tic-marks on the axes; plot points or functions; lower or raise the pen, either before or after movement; temporarily translate the established origin to any point within the plotting area and then plot, still in user-units, with respect to the new origin; plot in increments (that is, in user-units, plot any point with respect to the current pen position).

The writing commands enable most calculator keyboard characters to be printed on the plotter. The user can specify the position, height and width of the characters, and the direction in which they will be printed. A centering command (CPLOT) enables labels to be centered on some particular point, thus simplifying labelling of axes and of specific points on the graph. The format of labels and numbers -- field width, fixed or floating point, the number of digits following the decimal point, etc. -- is specified by standard FORMAT statements. In addition, a unique LETTER command establishes a typewriter mode enabling the plotter to be controlled and positioned from the calculator keyboard, on a character-by-character basis; this allows the user to add extra labelling or individual comments to his graphs.

Initializing the plotter

before plotting, the plotter must be prepared and the physical limits of the plotting area must be established. The front-panel controls on the plotter are used for this purpose.

Line and chart hold

the LINE pushbutton is the power switch for the plotter; press it to apply power, and press it again to remove power; the white LINE lamp lights whenever the plotter is ON.

Pressing CHART HOLD activates the electro-static paper hold-down mechanism. Pressing CHART HOLD again deactivates it. The plotter will not plot or letter, and the pen holder and arm will move freely in all directions when CHART HOLD IS deactivated.

Loading paper

to load paper, release CHART HOLD and manually move the pen arm all the way to one side of the plotter. Lay a sheet of paper on the plotting surface and smooth out any irregularities in the paper (you may also wish to ensure that the paper is squarely against the ridge at the bottom of the plotting surface); then activate CHART HOLD.

Graph limits

the graph limit controls are used to determine the physical size of the plot.

LOWER LEFT and the two knobs to its left are used to determine the physical location of the lower left hand corner of the plotting area.

UPPER RIGHT and the two knobs to its right are used to determine the physical location of the upper right-hand corner of the plotting area. Together, the upper right-hand corner and the lower left-hand corner determine the size of the plotting area.

Also, altering the lower left-hand setting will translate the upper right-hand setting by the same direction and amount.

To specify the lower left-hand corner of the plotting area, press LOWER LEFT; the pen will move (without touching the paper) to the lower left-hand corner of the plotting area. This point can be set anywhere within the lower left-hand quarter of the plotting surface (platen) by adjusting the two knobs associated with LOWER LEFT. Once the lower left-hand corner has been set, the upper right-hand corner is set in the same general way by pressing UPPER Right and adjusting the two knobs associated with it. Once the plotting area has been determined, it can be relocated by moving the position of the lower left-hand corner -- the upper right-hand corner will track the change.

PLOTTING COMMANDS

Notes: 1. all commands can be activated either from the keyboard or from a program except where noted. 2. All values in the following statements can be numbers, variables or expressions except where noted. 3. Any parameter enclosed in square brackets is optional as far as the statement containing it is concerned. However, program sense may dictate that the parameter be present in specific cases. The scale statement scale xmin, Xmax, Ymin, Ymax Examples: Scale -10, 10, -5, 5 scale -4pi, 4pi, .3, 1.1 establishes the full-scale units for the plot. Xmin to Xmax and Ymin to Ymax correspond exactly to the limits of the horizontal and vertical edges, respectively, of the plotting area (the area is established mechanically as previously described). This also establishes the point, on or off the plotting area, where the original of the graph (0, 0) is located.

A SCALE statement must be executed before any plotting can occur. Once established the scale remains established until one of the following occurs:

A new SCALE statement is executed. The program is initialized. A scratch or scratch a or scratch v is executed. The calculator is switched off.

The parameters (X, Y, etc.) in the SCALE statement must be given in the correct order. If the minimum or maximum values are switched no ERROR message will occur; however, subsequent plotting commands may not be executed properly.

The SCALE statement has no effect on the position of the pen.

The pen statement pen

the PEN statement is a stand-alone instruction requiring no parameter. It raises the pen without otherwise changing its position relative to the plotting area.

Instructions to raise or lower the pen, either before or after movement, can be easily included in several other statements (see PLOT and IPLOT) so there is no special lower pen instruction.

The offset statement offset x, y example: OFFSET 3, -3

Temporarily offsets the origin (point 0, 0 established by the previous SCALE statement) by an amount, and in the direction, determined by the values (in user-units) of X and Y. All future plotting commands are then made with respect to the new origin until such time as that origin is again changed by means of, for example, a new OFFSET or a new SCALE statement.

The OFFSET statements are not accumulative; that is, a new offset is with respect to the original origin and not with respect to the last offset origin.

Offsetting greatly simplifies plotting, from the user's point of view, when it becomes necessary to divide the plotting area into several smaller segments and then make a separate plot in each segment. As the plot is made in each segment it is not necessary for the user to correct each point before plotting; instead OFFSET statement moves the origin to some convenient point within that segment so that the calculator automatically makes the necessary corrections for each point plotted.

The axis statement x axis y-offset [, .+-.tic [, start point, end point]] or Y axis x-offset [, .+-.tic [, starting point, end point]] X axis 3, 1, -4, 4 draws an X-(or Y-) axis according to the parameters given in the AXIS statement. The pen is automatically raised both before and after drawing the axis. (NOTE: The following describes the X-axis; the same information is applicable to the Y-axis if left and right for the X-axis are read as, respectively, bottom and top for the Y-axis.) 1. If no optional parameters are given, draws a straight line from left to right across the complete plotting area (from Xmin to Xmax). The line crosses the Y-axis at a point determined by the value of y-offset. 2. If a tic parameter is included then tic marks are made along the axis as it is drawn; the value for tic determines the spacing, in user-units, between tics. The first tic is drawn at the starting point of the line. The tic parameter is usually positive (the sign is not required), but occasionally a negative tic spacing is useful -- see 4, below. 3. If the start point/end point parameters are given, then the axis is drawn only between the points specified -- from the start point to the end point. 4. a. A negative tic spacing when no start point/end point parameters are given results in a tic only at the left end (Xmin) of the axis. b. If the start point parameter is more positive than (i.e., to the right of) the end point parameter, then the axis is drawn from right to left; in this case, negative tic spacing results in normal tic marks being drawn along the axis. c. With the start point/end point parameters the same as in b above, a positive tic spacing results in a tic only at the right end (Xmax) of the axis. The plot statement plot x, y [, control pen] Plot sin(x), cos(x), -2 moves the pen to the co-ordinate specified by the value of X and Y.

When no optional control pen parameter is given:

If the pen was raised, it moves to the point specified and then lowers. If the pen was lowered, it remains lowered while moving to the point specified, thus drawing a line on the plotting surface. The Control Pen Parameter

The value and sign of this parameter in the PLOT (and IPLOT) statements determines whether the pen will be raised or lowered before or after it moves to the specified point.

If the parameter is: negative -- control occurs after movement; positive -- control occurs before movement; odd -- raises pen if it was lowered; even -- lowers pen if it was raised.

The value of the control parameter can be any number in the range .+-.32,767. If the value is not an integer then it is automatically rounded up or down according to the value of the fractional part of the number; that is up for .5 or greater, or down for less then .5. (Rounding is the same as the standard rounding in the calculator; it is not the same as the INT function, where the value becomes that of the next lower integer.)

The iplot statement iplot deltaX, deltaY [, control pen] Iplot 2, -3a/4, 1 moves the pen (from its current position) in the X direction and in the Y direction, by the amounts specified by deltaX and deltaY, respectively.

The control pen parameter is optional and operates exactly as described previously -- see the PLOT STATEMENT.

Notice that the action of the IPLOT statement is such that it is as if, during the execution of that statement only, the origin (0, 0) of the graph is offset to the current position of the pen. Pen movement is then related to that offset origin.

The IPLOT statement is most useful when drawing regular geometric shapes such as, for example, a swastika ( ). In this case each point is more easily plotted with respect to the previous point, rather than with respect to the origin of the graph.

The label statement label (format statement number or *[, character heigth in %, Aspect ratio, angle of rotation [, paper heigth/paper width]]) print list Examples: LABEL (x, 2, 2, 9, 0, "PLOTTER" Label (100) 1, a, sin(x) the LABEL statement is used to write alpha and numeric characters with the plotter. Several parameters are allowed which can be used to control the size, shape, and angle of rotation of the character printed. The character height can be specified in percent of the paper height. The aspect ratio is the ratio of the character height to the character width before any rotation. The angle of rotation of characters printed can be given. This parameter can be given in degrees, radians, or grads and is dependent on a previously given DEG, RAD, or GRAD statement. A fourth parameter can be specified. This is the ratio of the actual measured height of the plot paper to the measured width as set by the upper right and lower left positions. This parameter is necessary to keep proper aspect ratio of characters printed on an angle on a non-square plot. If not specified, the calculator will assume character height = 2.5%, aspect ratio = 2, rotation = 0, and paper ratio = 1.

The format specification and the print list are the same as a WRITE statement. If a FORMAT statement number is specified, the print list is written on the plotter using the specification given in the FORMAT statement. All specifications are allowed except B. If an * is used, the print list will be written according to standard format. This includes the normal definition of comma and semi-colon spacing, string fields, TAB, etc.

The LABEL statement will start printing characters at the current pen position. Anytime an end of line is needed, the plotter pen will return to the character position directly below the first character of the current line, simulating a carriage return, line feed.

If the string variables option block is also plugged into the memory, then string variables are allowed in the print list.

The letter statement letter when the LETTER statement is executed, the calculator enters a unique typewriter mode with the plotter as the printing device. While in this mode when the user hits any printing character on the keyboard, that character is immediately printed on the plotter at the current pen position. An EOL or EXECUTE will cause a carriage return, line-feed to be simulated. In addition, while in this mode the .uparw., .dwnarw., .rarw., and .fwdarw. keys can be used to position the pen. The .uparw. and .dwnarw. keys can cause the pen to move up or down one character position. The .rarw. and .fwdarw. keys cause the pen to move left or right one character position. If the shift key is held down at the same time as a pen control key, the pen will move one-tenth of a character position. Character size, aspect ratio, and rotation can be specified by giving a LABEL statement prior to the LETTER statement. The cplot statement cplot delta X characters, delta Y characters Example: CPLOT 5, -.3 The CPLOT statement is similar to the IPLOT statement in that it moves the pen to a position relative to the current pen position. The difference is that the delta X and delta Y values are specified in character size units. In the example above the pen would move five character position down. This statement is particularly useful in positioning the pen when labeling a plot using the LABEL statement. One character space is defined as follows: ##STR74##

The error messages given by the plotter module are:

Error 80 -- no scale statement executed before PLOT, IPLOT, OFFSET, or AXIS. Error 81 -- character size too large (limited to = 20%) or binary mode not allowed. Error 82 -- offset, point 1, or POINT 2 out of range during axis execution or tic increment in axis statement is too small.

MATRIX PLUG-IN READ-ONLY MEMORY MODULE

The Matrix read-only-memory module enables the calculator to understand the MAT statements of BASIC. These statements facilitate the matrix operations of addition, subtraction, initialization, scalar multiplication, matrix multiplication transposition, and inversion. A function additional to standard BASIC language matrix operations is provided for computing the determinate of a square matrix. The MAT READ and MAT PRINT commands facilitate entering data into an array and the printing thereof. The MAT INPUT command which appears in some versions of BASIC is not allowed. The matrix operations are allowed on split precision or integer arrays as well as full floating point arrays.

The operations performed by this matrix module are summarized below and additional information is provided above in Section IV, Matrices.

A. mat read reads numeric information from DATA statements into an array Mat read a mat read a(3,5) mat read b, w(8),x,y b. mat print prints complete arrays close packing specified with a semicolon Mat print a mat print a; mat print r,s;v;w c. zer, con, and IDN operations Zer: initialize an array to all zeros Con: initialize an array to all ones Idn: initialize an array to the identity matrix Mat a = zer mat q = con(9) mat i -- idn(4,4) d. mat assignment statements assign to a matrix the result of a MAT operation 1. MAT A = B assigns elements of A from array B 2. mat a = b .+-. c performs indicated addition or subtraction and assigns result to A any of A, B, and C may be the same matrix 3. MAT A = B * C performs indicated multiplication and assigns result to A array A must be distinct from B or C 4. mat a = (expression) * B performs the indicated scalar multiply (each element of B is multiplied by the value of the expression) and assigns the result to A 5. mat a = trn(b) assigns the transpose of B to A array A must be distinct from B 6. mat a = inv(b) assigns the inverse of B to A A and B may be the same matrix E. det operation calculates the determinant of a square matrix Mat d4 = det(a)

key codes and mnemonics

all of the keys of the keyboard input unit and their associated mnemonics and binary keycodes are listed in the Table below. Every key has one mnemonic and two keycodes, (namely, a shifted keycode and an unshifted keycode). Keycodes are applied to the CPU in eight-bit binary form. The first four bits of each keycode are given in the left-most vertical column of the table below and the next three bits of each keycode are given in the uppermost row of the table below. The eight bit of each keycode is the shift bit and is determined by whether or not the shift key of the keyboard input unit is depressed. Keycodes entered into the CPU from the keyboard input unit or from the program storage section of the memory unit are processed by the keyboard input routine 204 as generally described above in connection with FIG. 9 and as shown in detail in FIGS. 88A-G.

KEYCODE AND MNEMONIC TABLE__________________________________________________________________________ D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7b6 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1b5 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1b4 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1__________________________________________________________________________b3b2b1b0__________________________________________________________________________0 000 f0 RECALL SPACE 0 P PA__________________________________________________________________________0001 f1 FETCH 1 A Q STOP__________________________________________________________________________0010 f2 BACK 2 B R EOL__________________________________________________________________________0011 f3 FWD 3 C S DL__________________________________________________________________________0100 f4 ##STR75## 4 D T FXD__________________________________________________________________________0101 f5 ##STR76## 5 E U FLT__________________________________________________________________________0110 f6 ##STR77## 6 F V SCRATCH__________________________________________________________________________0111 f7 ##STR78## 7 G W AUTO__________________________________________________________________________1000 f8 LOAD ( 8 H X__________________________________________________________________________1001 f9 STORE ) 9 I Y__________________________________________________________________________1010 LIST INIT X ##STR79## J Z CLR__________________________________________________________________________1011 EXEC / + ##STR80## K RESULT__________________________________________________________________________1100 CONT , L__________________________________________________________________________1101 STEP STD - = M__________________________________________________________________________1110 TRACE NORMAL . N ##STR81##__________________________________________________________________________1111 RUN INSERT ##STR82## O ENTER EXP__________________________________________________________________________

BASIC INSTRUCTION SET

Every routine and subroutine of the calculator comprises a sequence of one or more of 71 basic sixteen-bit instructions listed below. These 71 instructions are all implemented serially by the micro-processor in a time period which varies according to the specific instruction, to whether or not it is indirect, and to whether or not the skip condition has been met.

Upon completion of the execution of each instruction, the program counter (P register) has been incremented by one except for instructions JMP, JSM, and the skip instructions in which the skip condition has been met. The M-register is left with contents identical to the P-register. The contents of the addressed memory location and the A and B registers are left unchanged unless specified otherwise.

memory Reference Group

The 14 memory reference instructions refer to the specific address in memory determined by the address field <m>, by the ZERO/CURRENT page bit, and by the DIRECT/INDIRECT bit. Page addressing and indirect addressing are both described in detail in the reference manuals for the Hewlett-Packard Model 2116 computer (hereinafter referred to as the HP 2116).

The address field <m> is a 10 bit field consisting of bits 0 through 9. The ZERO/CURRENT page bit is bit 10 and the DIRECT/INDIRECT bit is bit 15, except for reference to the A or B register in which case bit 8 becomes the DIRECT/INDIRECT bit. An indirect reference is denoted by a <, I> following the address <m>.

REGISTER REFERENCE OF A OR B REGISTER: If the location <A> or <B> is used in place of <m> for any memory reference instruction, the instruction will treat the contents of A or B exactly as it would be contents of location <m>. See the note below on the special restriction for direct register reference of A or B.

Ada m, I Add to A. The contents of the addressed memory location m are added (binary add) to contents of the A register, and the sum remains in the A register. If carry occurs from bit 15, the E register is loaded with 0001, otherwise E is left unchanged. Adb m, I Add to B. Otherwise identical to ADA. Cpa m,I compare to A and skip if unequal. The contents of the addressed memory location are compared with the contents of the A register. If the two 16-bit words are different, the next instruction is skipped; that is, the P and M registers are advanced by two instead of one. Otherwise, the next instruction will be executed in normal sequence. Cpb m,I Compare to B and skip is unequal. Otherwise identical to CPA. Lda m,I Load into A. The A register is loaded with the contents of the addressed memory location. Ldb m,I Load into B. The B register is loaded with the contents of the addressed memory location. Sta m,I Store A. The contents of the A register are stored into the addressed memory location. The previous contents of the addressed memory location are lost. Stb m,I Store B. Otherwise identical to STA. Ior m,I Inclusive OR to A. The contents of the addressed location are combined with the contents of the A register as an INCLUSIVE OR logic operation. Isz m,I Increment and Skip if Zero. The ISZ instruction adds ONE to the contents of the addressed memory location. If the result of this operaion is ZERO, the next instruction is skipped, that is, the P and M registers are advanced by TWO instead of ONE. The incremental value is writted back into the addressed memory location. Use of ISZ with the A or B register is limited to indirect reference; see footnote on restrictions. And m,I Logical AND to A. The contents of the addressed location are combined with the contents of the A register as an AND logic operation. Dsz m,I Decrement and Skip if Zero. The DSZ instruction subtracts ONE from the contents of the addressed memory location. If the result of this operation is zero, the next instruction is skipped. The decremented value is writted back into the addressed memory location. Use of DSZ with the A or B register is limited to indirect reference; see footnote on restrictions. Jsm m,I Jump to Subroutine. The JSM instruction permits jumping to a subroutine in either ROM or R/W memory. The contents of the P register is stored at the address contained in location 1777 (stack pointer). The contents of the stack pointer is incremented by one, and both M and P are loaded with the referenced memory location. Jmp m,I Jump. This instruction transfers control to the contents of the addressed location. That is, the referenced memory location is loaded into both M and P registers, effecting a jump to that location. Shift-Rotate Group

The eight shift-rotate instructions all contain a 4 bit variable shift field <n> which permits a shift of one through 16 bits; that is, 1 n 16. If <n> is omitted, the shift will be treated as a one bit shift. The shift code appearing in bits 8,7,6,5 is the binary code for n- 1, except for SAL and SBL, in which cases the complementary code for n- 1 is used.

Aar n Arithmethic right shift of A. The A register is shifted right n places with the sign bit (bit 15) filling all vacated bit positions. That is, the n+1 most significant bits become equal to the sign bit. Abr n Arithmetic right shift of B. Otherwise identical to AAR. Sar n Shift A right. The A register is shifted right n places with all vacated bit positions cleared. That is, the n most significant bits become equal to zero. Sbr n Shift B right. Otherwise identical to SAR. Sal n Shift A left. The A register is shifted left n places with the n least significant bits equal to zero. Sbl n Shift B left. Otherwise identical to SAL. Rar n Rotate A right. The A register is rotated right n places, with bit 0 rotated around to bit 15. Rbr n Rotate B right. Otherwise identical to RAR. Alter-Skip Group

The sixteen alter-skip instructions all contain a 5-bit variable skip field <n> which, upon meeting the skip condition, permits a relative branch to any one of 32 locations. Bits 9,8,7,6,5 are coded for positive or negative relative branching in which the number <n> is the number to be added to the current address, (skip in forward direction), and the number <-n> is the number to be subtracted from the current address, (skip in negative direction). If <n> is omitted, it will be interpreted as a ONE.

<n>=0 CODE=00000 REPEAT SAME INSTRUCTION<n>=1 CODE=00001 DO NEXT INSTRUCTION<n>=2 CODE=00010 SKIP ONE INSTRUCTION<n> =15 CODE=01111 ADD 15 TO ADDRESS<n>=-1 CODE=11111 DO PREVIOUS INSTRUCTION<n>=-16 CODE=10000 SUBTRACT 16 FROM ADDRESS<n>=nothing CODE=00001 DO NEXT INSTRUCTION

The alter bits consist of bits 10 and bits 4. The letter <S> following the instruction places a ONE in bit 10 which causes the tested bit to be set after the test. Similarly the letter <

> will place a ONE In bit 4 to clear the test bit. If both a set and clear bit are given, the set will take precedence. Alter bits do not apply to SZA, SZB, SIA, and SIB.

Sza n Skip if A zero. If all 16 bits of the A register are zero, skip to location defined by n. Szb n Skip if B zero. Otherwise identical to SZA. Rza n Skip if A not zero. This is a Reverse Sense skip of SZA Rzb n Skip if B not zero. Otherwise identical to RZA. Sia n Skip if A zero; then increment A. The A register is tested for zero, then incremented by one. If all 16 bits of A were zero before incrementing, skip to location defined by n. Sib n Skip if B zero; then increment B. Otherwise identical to SIA. Ria n Skip if A not zero; then increment A. This is a Reverse Sense skip of SIA. Rib n Skip if B not zero; then increment B. Otherwise identical to RIA. Sla n, S/C Skip if Least Significant bit of A is zero. If the least significant bit (bit 0) of the A register is zero, skip to location defined by n. If either S or C is present, the test bit is altered accordingly after test. Slb n, S/C Skip if Least Significant bit of B is zero. Otherwise identical to SLA. Sam n, S/C Skip if A is Minus. If the sign bit (bit 15) of the A register is a ONE, skip to location defined by n. If either S or C is present, bit 15 is altered after the test. Sbm n, S/C Skip if B is Minus. Otherwise identical to SAM. Sap n, S/C Skip if A is Positive. If the sign bit (bit 15) of the A register is a ZERO, skip to location defined by n. If either S or C is present, bit 15 is altered after the test. Sbp n, S/C Skip if B is Positive. Otherwise identical to SAP. Ses n, S/C Skip if Least Significant bit of E is Set. If bit O of the E register is a ONE, skip to location defined by n. If either S or C is present, the entire E register is set or cleared respectively. Sec n, S/C Skip if Least Significant bit of E is Clear. If bit 0 of the E register is a ZERO, skip to location defined by n. If either S or C is present, the entire E register is set or cleared respectively. Complement-Execute-DMA Group.

These seven instructions include complement operations and several special-purpose instructions chosen to speed up printing and extended memory operations.

Cma complement A. The A register is replaced by its One's complement. Cmb complement B. The B register is replaced by its One's complement. Tca two's Complement A. The A register is replaced by its One's Complement and incremented by one. Tcb two's complement B. The B register is replaced by its One's Complement and incremented by one. Exa execute A. The contents of the A register are treated as the current instruction, and excuted in the normal manner. The A register is left unchanged unless the instruction code causes A to be altered. Exb execute B. Otherwise identical to EXA. Dma direct Memory Access. The DMA control in Extended Memory is enabled by setting the indirect bit in M and giving a WTM instruction. The next ROM clock transfers A.fwdarw.M and the following two cycles transfer B.fwdarw.B. ROM clock then remains inhibited until relased by DMA control. Note: Special Restriction for Direct Register Reference of A or B

For the five register reference instructions which involve a write operation during execution, a register reference to A or B must be restricted to an INDIRECT reference. These instructions are STA, STB, ISZ, DSZ, and JSM. A DIRECT register reference to A or B with these instructions may result in program modification. (This is different from the hp 2116 in which a memory reference to the A or B register is treated as a reference to locations 0 or 1 respectively.) A reference to location 0 or 1 will actually refer to locations 0 or 1 in Read Only Memory.

Input/Output Group (IOG)

The eleven IOG instructions, when given with a select code, are used for the purpose of checking flags, setting or clearing flag and control flip-flops, and transferring data between the A/B registers and the I/O register.

Stf <sc> set the flag. Set the flag flip-flop of the channel indicated by select code <SC>. Clf <sc> clear the flag flip-flop of the channel indicated by select code <SC>. Sfc <sc> skip if flag clear. If the flag flip-flop is clear in the channel indicated by <SC>, skip the next instruction. Sfs <sc> h/c skip if flag set. If the flag flip-flop is set in the channel indicated by <SC>, skip the next instruction. H/C indicates if the flag flip-flop should be held or cleared after executing SFS. Clc <sc> h/c clear control. Clear the control flip-flop in the channel indicated by <SC>. H/C indicates if the flag flip-flop should be held or cleared after executing CLC. Stc <sc> h/c set Control. Set the control flip-flop in the channel indicated by <SC>. H/C indicates if the flag flip-flop should be held or cleared after executing STC. Ot* <sc> h/c output A or B. Sixteen bits from the A/B register are output to the I/O register. H/C allows holding or clearing the flag flop after execution of OT*. The different select codes allow different functions to take place after loading the I/O register. Sc=00 data from the A or B register is output eight bits at a time for each OT* instruction given. The A or B register is rotated right eight bits. Sc=01 the I/O register is loaded with 16 bits from the A/B registers. Sc=02 data from the A/B register is output one bit at a time for each OT* instruction for the purpose of giving data to the Magnetic Card Reader. The I/O register is unchanged. Sc=04 the I/O register is loaded with 16 bits from the A/B register and the control flip flop for the printer is then set. Sc=08 the I/O register is loaded with 16 bits from the A/B register and the control flip flop for the display is then set. Sc=16 the I/O register is loaded with 16 bits from the A/B register and then data in the I/O register is transferred to the switch latches. Li* <01> h/c load into A or B. Load 16 bits of data into the A/B register from the I/O register. H/C allows holding or clearing the flag flop after L1* has been executed. Li* <00> the least significant 8 bits of the I/O register are loaded into the most significant locations in the A or B register. Mi* <01> h/c merge into A or B. Merge 16 bits of data into the A/B register from the I/O register by inclusive or. H/C allows holding or clearing the flag flop after MT* has been executed. Mi* <00> the least significant 8 bits of the I/O register are combined by inclusive OR with the least significant 8 bits of the A or B register, and rotated to the most significant bit locations of the A or B register. Mac instruction Group

A total of 16 MAC instructions are available for operation

a. with the whole floating-point data (like transfer, shifts, etc), or b. with two floating-point data words to speed up digit and word loops in arithmethic routines. Note: <a.sub.0-3 > means: contents of A-register bit 0 to 3 Ar 1 is a mnemonix for arithmetic pseudo-register located in R/W memory on addresses 1744 to 1747 (octal) Ar 2 is a mnemonix for arithmethic pseudo-register located in R/W memory on addresses 1754 to 1757 (octal) D.sub.i means: mantissas i-th decimal digit; most significant digit is D1 least significant digit is D12 decimal point is located between D1 and D2 Every operation with mantissa means BCD-coded decimal operation. Ret return 16-bit-number stored at highest occupied address in stack is transferred to P- and M-registers. Stack pointer (=next free address in stack) is decremented by one. <A>, <B>, <E> unchanged. Mov move overflow The contents of E-register is transferred to A.sub.0-3. Rest of A-register and E-register are filled by zeros. <B> unchanged. Clr clear a floating-point data register in R/W memory on location <A> Zero.fwdarw.<a>, <a>+1, <a>+2, <a>+3 <a>, >b>, <e> unchanged Exf floating-point data transfer in R/W memory from location <A> to location <B>. Routine starts with exponent word transfer. Data on location <A> is unchanged. <E> unchanged. Mrx ar1 mantissa is shifted to right n-times. Exponent word remains unchanged. <B.sub.0-3 > = n (binary coded) 1st shift: <A.sub.0-3 >.fwdarw.D.sub.1 ; D.sub.i .fwdarw.D.sub.i.sub.+1 ; D.sub.12 is lost jth shift: .theta. .fwdarw. D.sub.1 ; D.sub.i .fwdarw.D.sub.i.sub.+1 ; D.sub.12 is lost nth shift: .theta. .fwdarw. D.sub.1 ; D.sub.i .fwdarw.D.sub.i.sub.+1 ; D.sub.12 .fwdarw. A.sub.0-3 .theta. .fwdarw. e, a.sub.4-15 each shift: <B.sub.0-3 > - 1 .fwdarw. B.sub.0-3 <b.sub.4-15 > unchanged Mry ar2 mantissa is shifted to right n-times. Otherwise identical to MRX Mls ar2 mantissa is shifted to left once. Exponent word remains unchanged. .theta. .fwdarw. D.sub.12 ; D.sub.i .fwdarw. D.sub.i.sub.-1 ; D.sub.1 .fwdarw. A.sub.0-3 <b> unchanged Drs ar1 mantissa is shifted to right once Exponent word remains unchanged .theta. .fwdarw. D.sub.1 ; D.sub.1 .fwdarw. D.sub.i.sub.+1 ; D.sub.12 .fwdarw. A.sub.0-3 Zero .fwdarw. e and A.sub.4-15 <b> unchanged Dls ar1 mantissa is shifted to left once. Exponent word remains unchanged. <A.sub.0-3 > .fwdarw. D.sub.12 ; D.sub.i .fwdarw. D.sub.i-1 ; D.sub.1 .fwdarw. A.sub.0-3 .theta. .fwdarw. e, a.sub.4-15 <b> unchanged Fxa fixed-point addition Mantissas in pseudo-registers AR2 and AR1 are added together and result in placed into AR2. Both exponent words remain unchanged. When overflow occurs 0001 is set into E-reg., in opposite case <E> will be zero. <AR2> + <AR1> + DC .fwdarw. AR2 Dc = .theta. if <E> was 0000 before routine execution Dc = 1 if <E> was 1111 before routine execution <B>, <AR1> unchanged Fmp fast multiply Mantissas in pseudo-registers AR2 and AR1 are added together <B.sub.0-3 >-times and result is placed into AR2. Total decimal overflow is placed to A.sub.0-3. Both exponent words remain unchanged. <AR2> + <AR1> * <B.sub.0-3 >+DC .fwdarw. AR2 Dc = 0 if <E> was 0000 before routine execution Dc = 1 if <E> was 1111 before routine execution Zero .fwdarw. e, a.sub.4-15 <ar1> unchanged Fdv fast divide Mantissas in pseudo-registers AR2 and AR1 are added together so many times until first decimal overflow occurs. Result is placed into AR2. Both exponent words remain unchanged. Each addition without overflow causes +1 increment of <B>. 1st addition: <AR2> + <AR1> + DC .fwdarw. AR2 Dc = 0 if <E> was 0000 before routine execution Dc 32 1 if <E> was 1111 before routine execution next additions: <AR2> + <AR1> .fwdarw. AR2 Zero .fwdarw. e <ar1> unchanged Cmx 10's complement of AR1 mantissa is placed back to AR1, and ZERO is set into E-register. Exponent word remains unchanged <B> unchanged Cmy 10's complement of AR2 mantissa. Otherwise identical to CMY Mdi mantissa decimal increment. Mantissa on location <A> is incremented by decimal ONE on D.sub.12 level, result is placed back into the same location, and zero is set into E-reg. Exponent word is unchanged. When overflow occurs, result mantissa will be 1,000 0000 0000 (dec) and 0001 (bin) will be set into E-reg. <B> unchanged. Nrm normalization Mantissa in pseudo-register AR2 is rotated to the left to get D.sub.1 .noteq. 0. Number of these 4-bit left shifts is stored in B.sub.0-3 in binary form (<B.sub.4-15 >=0) when <B.sub.0-3 > = 0,1,2,. . . . , 11 (dec) .fwdarw. <E> = 0000 When <B.sub.0-3 > = 12 (dec) .fwdarw.mantissa is zero, and <E>= 0001 Exponent word remains unchanged <A> unchanged.

The binary codes of all of the above instructions are listed in the following coding table, where * implies the A or B register, D/I means direct/indirect, A/B means A register/B register, Z/C means zero page (base page) (current page, H/S means hold test bit/set test bit, and H/C means hold test bit/clear test bit. D/I, A/B, Z/C, H/S and H/C are all coded as 0/1.

CODING TABLE__________________________________________________________________________GROUP OCTAL INSTR 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0__________________________________________________________________________ MEMORY -0 ---- AD* D/I 0 0 0 A/B Z/C ##STR83##REFERENCE1---- CP* D/I 0 0 1 A/B Z/CGROUP2---- LO* D/I 0 1 0 A/B Z/C3---- ST* D/I 0 1 1 A/B Z/Cr---- IOR D/I 1 0 0 0 Z/C4---- ISZ D/I 1 0 0 1 Z/C5---- AND D/I 1 0 1 0 Z/C5---- DSZ D/I 1 0 1 1 Z/C6---- JSM D/I 1 1 0 0 Z/C6---- JMP D/I 1 1 0 1 Z/C__________________________________________________________________________ SHIFT- 07---0 A*R 0 1 1 1 A/B - - ##STR84## - 0 0 0 0ROTATE 07---2 S*R 0 1 1 1 A/B 0 0 1 0GROUP 07---4 S*L 0 1 1 1 A/B 0 1 0 0 07---6 R*R 0 1 1 1 A/B 0 1 1 0__________________________________________________________________________ ALTER- 07---0 SZ* 0 1 1 1 A/B 0 ##STR85## 0 1 0 0 0SKIP 07-- -0 RZ* 0 1 1 1 A/B 1 0 1 0 0 0GROUP 07---0 SI* 0 1 1 1 A/B 0 1 1 0 0 0 07---0 RI* 0 1 1 1 A/B 1 1 1 0 0 0 07---1 SL* 0 1 1 1 A/B H/S H/C 1 0 0 1 07---2 S*M 0 1 1 1 A/B H/S H/C 1 0 1 0 07---3 S*P 0 1 1 1 A/B H/S H/C 1 0 1 1 07---4 SES 0 1 1 1 A/B H/S H/C 1 1 0 0 07---5 SEC 0 1 1 1 A/B H/S H/C 1 1 0 1__________________________________________________________________________D/I 07-- 17 ADA 0 1 1 1 A/B D/I 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 REFERENCE 07--37 ADB 0 1 1 1 A/B D/I 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 GROUP 07--57 CPA 0 1 1 1 A/B D/I 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 07--77 CPB 0 1 1 1 A/B O/I 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 07--17 LDA 0 1 1 1 A/B D/I 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 07--37 LDB 0 1 1 1 A/B D/I 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 07-557 STA 0 1 1 1 A/B 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 07-577 STB 0 1 1 1 A/B 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 07--17 IOR 0 1 1 1 A/B D/I 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 07-637 ISZ 0 1 1 1 A/B 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 07--57 AND 0 1 1 1 A/B D/I 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 07-677 DSZ 0 1 1 1 A/B 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 07-717 JSM 0 1 1 1 A/B 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 07--37 JMP 0 1 1 1 A/B D/I 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 COMP 07-016 EX* 0 1 1 1 A/B 0 0 1 1 1 0 EXECUTE 070036 DMA 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 DMA 07-056 CM* 0 1 1 1 A/B 1 0 1 1 1 0 07-076 TC* 0 1 1 1 A/B 1 1 1 1 1 0__________________________________________________________________________ INPUT 1727-- STF 1 1 1 1 - 1 0 1 1 1 1 ##STR86##OUTPUT 1737-- CLF 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1GROUP 17-7-- SFC 1 1 1 1 1 H/C 1 1 1 0 17-5-- SFS 1 1 1 1 1 H/C 1 0 1 0 17-5-- CLC 1 1 1 1 1 H/C 1 0 1 1 17-6-- STC 1 1 1 1 1 H/C 1 1 0 0 17-1-- OT* 1 1 1 1 A/B 1 H/C 0 0 1 1 17-2-- LI* 1 1 1 1 A/B 1 H/C 0 1 0 1 17-0-- MI* 1 1 1 1 A/B 1 H/C 0 0 0 1__________________________________________________________________________MAC 170402 RET 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0GROUP 170002 MOV 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 170000 CLR 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 170004 XFR 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 174430 MRX 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 174470 MRY 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 171400 MLS 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 170410 DRS 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 175400 DLS 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 170560 FXA 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 171460 FMP 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 170420 FDV 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 174400 CMX 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 170400 CMY 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 170540 MDI 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 171450 NRM 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0__________________________________________________________________________

DETAILED LISTING OF ROUTINES AND SUBROUTINES OF BASIC INSTRUCTIONS

A complete listing of all of the routines and subroutines of basic instructions employed by the calculator and of all of the constants employed by these routines and subroutines is given below. All of these routines, subroutines, and constants are stored either in the basic ROM or in the plug-in ROM modules employed therewith. Each page within the listing is numbered at the upper left-hand corner, and its number within the specification as a whole is indicated at the bottom of the page. Each line of each page is separately numbered in the first column from the left-hand side of the page. This facilitates reference to different parts of the listing. Descriptive headings are also provided throughout the listing to identify routines, subroutines, groups of constants, different portions of the ROM, the plug-in ROM modules, etc. Each instruction of each routine or subroutine and each constant stored in the ROM or plug-in ROM modules is represented in octal form by six digits in the third column from the left-hand side of the page, and the address of the ROM location in which each such instruction or constant is stored is represented in octal form by five digits in the second column from the left-hand side of the page.

Mnemonic labels serving as symbolic addresses or names are given in the fourth column from the left-hand side of the page for most of the constants and many of the instructions to facilitate references to these constants and instructions and associated instructions. the mnemonic code of each basic instruction and of each pseudo instruction is given in the fifth column from the left-hand side of the page. As noted above, each basic instruction is employed as a step in a routine or subroutine of one or more basic instructions and therefore has an address in the ROM. Pseudo instructions such as ORG, EQU, etc. which appear (and are recognizable as not being one of the 71 basic machine instructions listed above) are used for control of the Assembler, which translates the symbolic/mnemonic coding of the fourth, fifth, and sixth columns into the address and contents of ROM registers which appear in the second and third columns. (See chapter 4 of the Hewlett-Packard "Assembler Programmer's Reference Manual" of April, 1970.) They are not employed as steps in the routines and subroutines performed by the calculator and therefore have no addresses in the ROM. Mnemonic operand codes are given in the sixth column from the left-hand side of the page, and descriptive comments are given to the right of the sixth column. The format, assembly, and use of the listing is explained in greater detail in the above-mentioned Hewlett-Packard "Assembler Programmer's Reference Manual".

In addition, cross-reference symbol tables are included directly below each group of routines and subroutines for providing an alphabetical listing of each of the mnemonic labels and operands. The number contained in the first column to the right of each mnemonic in the cross-reference table represents the line in the associated routine or subroutine listing at which that mnemonic appears as a label in column four. Subsequent columns beyond the first column to the right of each mnemonic in the cross-reference table represent the line in the associated routine or subroutine listing at which that mnemonic appears as an operand in column six. ##SPC2## ##SPC3## ##SPC4## ##SPC5## ##SPC6## ##SPC7## ##SPC8## ##SPC9## ##SPC10## ##SPC11## ##SPC12## ##SPC13## ##SPC14## ##SPC15## ##SPC16## ##SPC17## ##SPC18## ##SPC19## ##SPC20## ##SPC21## ##SPC22## ##SPC23## ##SPC24## ##SPC25## ##SPC26## ##SPC27## ##SPC28## ##SPC29## ##SPC30## ##SPC31## ##SPC32## ##SPC33## ##SPC34## ##SPC35## ##SPC36## ##SPC37## ##SPC38## ##SPC39## ##SPC40## ##SPC41## ##SPC42## ##SPC43## ##SPC44## ##SPC45## ##SPC46## ##SPC47## ##SPC48## ##SPC49## ##SPC50## ##SPC51## ##SPC52## ##SPC53## ##SPC54## ##SPC55## ##SPC56## ##SPC57## ##SPC58## ##SPC59## ##SPC60## ##SPC61##

MICROPROCESSOR

All of the above-listed routines and subroutines of basic instructions are implemented by the basic computing system shown in FIGS. 3A-B. Central control of this system is achieved by microprocessor 120. As shown in the block diagram of FIG. 27 and in the detailed scehmatic diagram of FIGS. 28 A-D, the microprocessor comprises a bipolar ROM 300 including seven ROM chips organized into 256 words of 28 bits. Eight J-K flip-flops contain the ROM address; (i.e. a 4-bit primary address and a 4-bit secondary address). A single chip 16-bit data selector permits any one of 16 different qualifier lines to be tested with a 4-bit qualifier code. This 4-bit qualifier code ROM chip serves a dual function in that it provides a complementing code to the 4 primary address flip-flops as well as selecting the proper qualifier to be tested. If branching in any ROM state is desired, the microinstruction BRC must also be given, BRC occurring with a QN (qualifier not met) signal from the data selector will cause the least significant bit of the address code to be inhibited to the secondary address flip-flop, thus causing the address to branch according to the state of the qualifier.

An additional feature of this ROM organization is the IQN microinstruction (inhibit if qualifier not met). When the IQN is given and the qualifier selected by the qualifier code is not met, the signal CCO (clock code zero) goes low. This inhibits all shift clock pulses from the clock decoder which in effect prevents execution of microinstructions in that ROM state.

To minimize the ROM word length, two 3-to-8 line decoders are used to expand 3 R-code outputs and 3 X-code outputs into a total of 14 microinstructions. Also the SCO and SCI outputs from ROM No. 5 are decoded in the Memory. The ALU code outputs AC0, AC1, and AC2 are treated as address inputs to the ALU ROM and therefore need no decoding.

The microprocessor is responsible for the following:

1. Issuing a four-bit clock code to the clock decoder during each ROM state. 2. Issuing microinstructions to the memory, including the read and write microinstructions. 3. Issuing microinstructions to the shift registers for gating serial data into or out of the proper registers. 4. Issuing a four-bit ALU code to the Arith Logic Unit to select the proper binary or BCD arithmetic function. 5. Performing logical decisions (branching) based on the states of 16 qualifier inputs to the microprocessor. 6. Issuing next address information to the ROM address flip-flops in the microprocessor. 7. Transferrinng control to the input/output controller via the I/O strobe for execution of input or output instructions.

The full set of 28 ROM outputs with their associated microinstructions, the list of 16 qualifiers and assigned codes, and the microprocessor mnemonics are contained in the following tables:

__________________________________________________________________________MICRO-INSTRUCTION SET TABLE ##STR87## ##STR88##CONTROL ROM DECODED .mu.-INSTRUCTIONFIELD OUTPUT OUTPUT FUNCTION__________________________________________________________________________GENERAL 1. IQN INHIBIT SHIFT CLOCK IF QUALIFIER NOT MET. 2. BRC BRANCH: INHIBITS SO0 IF QUALIFIER NOT MET. ##STR89## ##STR90## ##STR91## ##STR92## ##STR93## DECODED IN MEMORY ##STR94## SC1- SC0 S-CODE 6. SC1 ZTS 0 0 ##STR95## 7. SC0 MTS 0 1 ##STR96## TTS 1 0 ##STR97## UTS 1 1 ##STR98## DECODED IN MICROPROCESSOR RC2 RC1 RC0 R-CODE 8. RC2 UTR 0 0 0 ##STR99## 9. RC1 PTR 0 0 1 ##STR100## 10. RC0 TRE 0 1 0 ##STR101## WTM . 2TR 0 1 1 ##STR102## TQ6 . 2TR 1 0 0 ##STR103## QTR 1 0 1 ##STR104## RDM . ZTR 1 1 0 ##STR105## ZTR 1 1 1 ##STR106## DECODED IN MICROPROCESSOR XC2 XC1 XC0 X-CODE 11. XC2 TTQ 0 0 0 ##STR107## 12. XC1 QAB 0 0 ##STR108## 13. XC0 BCD 0 1 0 BCD ARITHMETIC MODE OF ALU TBE 0 1 1 ##STR109## CAB 1 0 0 COMPLEMENT THE AB FLIP-FLOP TPP 1 0 1 ##STR110## TTX 1 1 0 ##STR111## NOP 1 1 1 NONE OF THE ABOVE DECODED IN ALU AC2 AC1 AC0 ALU 14. AC2 XOR 0 0 0 ##STR112## 15. AC1 AND 0 0 1 ##STR113## 16. AC0 IOR 0 1 0 ##STR114## ZTT 0 1 1 ##STR115## ZTT . CBC 1 0 0 ##STR116## IOR . CBC 1 0 1 INCLUSIVE OR, CLEAR BINARY CARRY IOR . SBC 1 1 0 INCLUSIVE OR, SET BINARY CARRY ADD 1 1 1 BINARY ADD__________________________________________________________________________CONTROL ROMFIELD OUTPUT FUNCTION__________________________________________________________________________CLOCK 17. CC1 THIS 4-BIT CODE INITIALIZES A PRESETTABLE 18. CC2 DOWN COUNTER TO GENERATE ANY NUMBER 19. CC4 OF SHIFT CLOCKS FROM 1 THROUGH 16. 20. CC8 SHIFT IS INHIBITED BY IQN IF QUALIFIER NOT MET.QUALIFIER 21. QC3 THIS 4-BIT CODE PERFORMS TWO FUNCTIONS: 22. QC2 (1.) ADDRESSING THE DATA SELECTOR TO SELECT 23. QC1 ONE OF SIXTEEN QUALIFIER INPUTS, 24. QC0 (2.) PROVIDES COMPLEMENT CODE TO PRIMARY FLIP-FLOPSSECONDARY 25. S03 10 THIS 4-BIT-CODE PROVIDES COMPLEMENTADDRESS 26. S02 CODE TO THE SECONDARY FLIP-FLOPS. 27. S01 IF BRC IS GIVEN AND QUALIFIER IS NOT 28. SO0 MET, THE SO0 BIT IS INHIBITED__________________________________________________________________________SPECIAL MICRO-INSTRUCTIONS: ##STR117## ##STR118##SPECIAL OPERATIONS: ##STR119##CLEAR DECIMAL CARRY = QAB . ROM CLOCKSET DECIMAL CARRY = UTR . BCD . ROM CLOCK ##STR120## ##STR121##__________________________________________________________________________QUALIFIER SET TABLEQUALIFIER CODEQC3 QC2 QC1 QC0 MNEMONIC FUNCTION__________________________________________________________________________0 0 0 0 Q00 SHIFT/SKIP ONE BIT0 0 0 1 Q01 SHIFT/SKIP TWO BITS0 0 1 0 Q02 SHIFT/SKIP FOUR BITS0 0 1 1 Q03 SHIFT/SKIP EIGHT BITS0 1 0 0 Q04 FAST SQUARE ROOT QUALIFIER0 1 0 1 Q05 SET BIT IN G/S GROUP; FDV QUALIFIER0 1 1 0 Q06 T-BUS QUALIFIER VIA TQ60 1 1 1 QBC BINARY CARRY FROM ALU1 0 0 0 QP0 P REGISTER, BIT 0, FOR BCD COUNTING1 0 0 1 Q15 INDIRECT ADDRESS, CLEAR BIT IN G/S GROUP1 0 1 0 QMR MEMORY REFERENCE QUALIFIER1 0 1 1 Q10 CURRENT PAGE QUALIFIER, FXA QUALIFIER1 1 0 0 QNR NON-SERVICE REQUEST QUALIFIER1 1 0 1 Q08 FMP QUALIFIER1 1 1 0 QDC DECIMAL CARRY FROM ALU1 1 1 1 *QRD ROM DISABLE (NORMALLY ZERO)POP WILL PRESET ROM ADDRESS FLIP-FLOPS AT TURN-ON__________________________________________________________________________ *QRD MAY BE USED WITH ION TO INSURE ZERO SHIFT EXCEPT WHEN IN I/O LOOP ______________________________________MICROPROCESSOR MNEMONICS______________________________________Clock SignalsMCK Memory ClockSCK Shift ClockXTC External ClockRCF ROM Clock for Flip FlopsRCA ROM Clock for Address Flip Flops ##STR122## Inhibit Internal Clock ##STR123## Inhibit Clock ##STR124## ##STR125##CC8CC4 Clock Code: Binary Code thatCC2 programs the numberCC1 of shift clocks ##STR126## Inhibits Shift ClocksAddress Mnemonics ##STR127## Power on PresetIQN Inhibit if Qualifier not metBRC BranchQ-Register ##STR128## ##STR129## ##STR130## T-Bus to Q-Register ##STR131## Q-Register to R-BusQ10Q9Q8Q7Q6Q5 Bits 10 - 0 of Q-RegisterQ4Q3Q2Q1Q0Data QualifiersQP0 Bit 0 of P-RegisterQRD Qualifier ROM Disable (I/O interupt)QNR Qualifier No Request (Keyboard Interupt)QDC Decimal CarryQBC Binary CarryMemorySC0 S-Bus CodeSCI ##STR132## T-Bus to T-Register ##STR133## T-Bus to M-Register ##STR134## Read Memory ##STR135## Write MemoryA, B, P, E-RegistersQAB Q-Register to B Flip FlopAB = 0 A-Register Operation ##STR136## B-Register Operation ##STR137## ##STR138## ##STR139## ##STR140## ##STR141## T-Bus to P-Register ##STR142## ##STR143## ##STR144## ##STR145## ##STR146## T-Register to E-Register ##STR147## ##STR148##AC2AC1 Arithmetic Codes for ArithmeticAC0 Logic Unit ##STR149## Decimal ArithmeticSDR Disables ROMs for Single Step Tester Operation______________________________________

Each of the ROM chips of FIGS. 27 and 28A-D is organized into 256 words of 4 bits each constructed in accordance with the following table, where each L represents a low (or 0) state and each H represents a high or (1) state: ##SPC62##

Each of the 71 basic instructions employed by the calculator is implemented by one or more of the above-described microinstructions and associated control signals issued by the microprocessor. The manner in which this is accomplished is shown and described in detail in the flow charts of FIGS. 29A-H. Each rectangular box of these flow charts represents a state of ROM 300 of the microprocessor and includes the mnemonic of the microinstructions and control signals stored in that ROM state. The number at the upper right-hand corner of each of these rectangular boxes represents the number of shift clock pulses required by the microinstructions of that ROM state. A simplified overview of these detailed flow charts is shown in FIGS. 6A-B.

PROGRAMMABLE CLOCK

Given a computing system organized to process binary data serially and under control of microinstructions stored in ROM 300 as shown in FIGS. 3A-B and 27, the implementation of a general purpose instruction set requires that some number of bits be shifted into or out of the storage registers. Depending on the operation being performed, the number of bits may vary from zero to n, where n is the number of bits in a single machine word.

If each clock period of the ROM clock corresponds to a one bit shift, a count loop must be employed to provide the desired number of shifts. A rather large number of such count loops would exist in order to implement an entire instruction set. An alternative method is to provide additional hardware which permits assignment of the desired number of shifts in a single state of ROM 300. Such an arrangement requires a variable cycle time for each state of ROM 300 but results in a very substantive saving in total number of ROM states.

To implement a variable number of shift clocks in a single state of the microprocessor, two separate clocks are required. The shift clock is applied to the data storage registers in the memory, the shift register block, the arithmetic logic unit and the input/output block. The ROM clock is applied to the ROM address flip-flops in the microprocessor, and occurs once for each state in the microprogram. The number of shift clock pulses that occurs in any given ROM state is determined by a 4-bit clock code set to the clock decoder from the microprocessor.

If no shift clocks are desired, a separate signal CC0 from the microprocessor inhibits the shift clock output, independent of the clock code issued in that state. In this way, any number of shifts between and including zero and 16 may be implemented with a 4-bit clock code and an inhibit signal.

This inhibit signal offers an additional powerful feature when gated by the qualifier test logic in the microprocessor as shown in FIG. 3A. The qualifier test logic includes a 4-bit qualifier code from ROM 3 that selects one of 16 qualifier inputs to the data selector. The data selector output QN (qualifier not met) will be high if the selected qualifier input was low. By using the QN signal to gate the inhibit microinstruction, IQN, the shift clock will be inhibited only when the qualifier is not met. Thus, all microinstructions requiring shift clocks that are issued in a given ROM state may be either executed or inhibited, depending on the logical state of the qualifier under test.

The ROM clock is applied to the eight J-K flip-flops which address the 256 word microprocessor ROM. During any given state, the complementing (J-K) inputs to the 4 primary address flip-flops are set up by the qualifier code or q-register code. The 4 secondary address flip-flop inputs are determined by the ROM 4 outputs, the BRC microinstruction, and the data selector output QN. Where ROM clock goes low, the negative edge-triggered flip-flops will cause transition of the ROM address to the next ROM state.

As shown in the block diagram of FIG. 30 and the detailed schematic diagram of FIGS. 31A-C, a crystal controlled system clock output is inverted to generate memory clock, MCK. This signal is again inverted to clock a D flip-flop having an output (control clock), which will go low if the end-of-count signal (borrow) from the down counter has occurred at the D input. The ROM clock will also go low at this time, initiating a new ROM state in the microprocessor. Control clock will normally remain low for one system clock period, and in turn generates a load signal which is delayed a half period from control clock by means of a second D flip-flop. The 4-bit clock code from the microprocessor is preset into the counter while the load signal is low.

As the load signal goes high, ROM clock also goes high, completing the fixed interval portion of ROM clock and shift clock as shown in FIG. 32. A series of clock pulses are now gated onto shift clock, SCK, until the preset counter has counted down to zero, causing control clock to again go low, completing the ROM cycle.

The inhibit signal, INH, from memory may lengthen the normal fixed interval of ROM clock by clearing the D flip-flop and holding control clock low. This may occur during memory refresh or external test operations. In this situation, the counter remains preset and the correct number of shifts will be generated when the inhibit goes away.

SHIFT REGISTER UNIT

As shown in the detailed schematic diagrams of FIGS. 28A-D and 33A-D, A-register 122, B-register 124, P-register 126, Q-register 128, and E-register 130 of FIGS. 3A-B comprise bipolar status registers, the contents of which are recirculated when data is output to the R-bus or the S-bus. Full control of these registers in use and type of operations performed is maintained by the microinstructions from the microprocessor. The number of bits to be shifted in any one ROM state of the microprocessor is determined by the number of shift clocks from the clock decoder. This shift clock appears at the shift clock input of each shift register that is enabled by the microprocessor during that ROM cycle.

ARITHMETIC LOGIC UNIT

development of complex read-only memory arrays on a single chip have made possible a hardware implementation of central processing units (CPUs) and arithmetic logic units (ALUs) with far fewer components than were previously possible. In this application, two bipolar read-only memory chips are combined with carry flip-flops and adapted to perform one-bit binary logic and arithmetic operations as well as four-bit binary-coded-decimal (BCD) arithmetic operations. The two bipolar read-only memory chips may comprise, for example, Hewlett-Packard 16-pin dual-in-line packaged bipolar ROMs organized into 256 words by 4-bits and of the same type as shown and described in U.S. Pat. No. 3,721,964

The binary/BCD Arithmetic Logic Unit consists of five integrated circuits connected as shown in the block diagram of FIG. 34 and the detailed schematic diagram of FIGS. 33A-D. Specifically, the packages consist of two 1024-bit ROMs, a dual D-type flip-flop and two quad two-input NAND gates.

Internally the desired binary logical function, binary arithmetic operation or BCD operation is selected by the ALU code as shown below.

__________________________________________________________________________ ALU CODE BCD AC2 AC1 AC0 ALU FUNCTION DESCRIPTION__________________________________________________________________________ 0 0 0 0 XOR ##STR150## 0 0 0 1 AND ##STR151## 0 0 1 0 IOR ##STR152##Binary 0 0 1 1 ZTT ##STR153##Functions 0 1 0 0 ZZT.CBC ##STR154## 0 1 0 1 IOR.CBC Inclusive OR, Clear Binary Carry 0 1 1 0 IOR.SBC Inclusive OR, Set Binary Carry 0 1 1 1 ADD ##STR155##BCD 1 0 1 1 BCD ADD ##STR156##Functions 1 1 1 1 BCD COMP/ADD IO's Complement and BCD ADD__________________________________________________________________________ALU FUNCTION CODE ASSIGNMENTS The function code input BCD selects between the binary mode and BCD mode of operation.

In the binary mode, the function code inputs AC0 AC1, and AC2 select the desired logical function or arithmetic operation. The binary input data enters ROM No. 1 on the carry, S-bus and R-bus input lines, and the binary result appears on the T-bus and binary carry output lines. ROM No. 2 is not used in the binary mode.

In the BCD mode of operation, the two function code lines AC0 and AC1 are disabled from the Micro-processor and these two lines carry the T02 and T03 bits of BCD data from the T-Register. The ALU function code line AC2 is used to select the desired BCD operation. If AC2 is low, the four-bit output .SIGMA.0,.SIGMA.1,.SIGMA.2,.SIGMA.3 will be the BCD sum of the two BCD data inputs. If AC2 is high and decimal carry has been set, the four-bit output .SIGMA.0,.SIGMA.1,.SIGMA.2,.SIGMA.3 will be the BCD Tens Complement of the BCD data from the T-Register. In the BCD mode, the binary carry output will be disabled and the decimal carry output will be enabled to ROM No. 1.

Although only one-fourth of the available registers in ROM No. 1 are required for the eight binary operations, the concept of adding a second 1024-bit ROM to perform the BCD operations grew from several basic concepts:

1. The least significant BCD sum bit, .SIGMA.0, is always identical to the binary sum bit; therefore, only three additional outputs .SIGMA.1,.SIGMA.2, and .SIGMA.3 need be generated. For BCD complement operations, the decimal carry flip-flop defines whether or not the least significant bit should be complemented. 2. In forming the nine's complement of the T-Register BCD data in ROM No. 1, it can be seen that for 8421 code the second least significant bit T01 is the same before and after forming the complement. Thus only two bits, T02 and T03 need be complemented prior to input into ROM No. 2. The ten's complement with add is then found by presetting decimal carry and performing a BCD sum of the three most significant digits in ROM No. 2. 3. With only eight ROM inputs available, some sharing of inputs is required for ROM No. 1. During binary operations, all four function codes and only one bit of T-Register data is required. During BCD operations, all four bits of T-Register data and only two function codes are required. Use of two NAND gates in wire-OR connection with the open collector function codes AC0 and AC1 permits sharing of the two inputs.

This arrangement left one input still available to ROM No. 2. By programming this input to always make output DCI true, the micro-instruction UTR can serve two purposes--placing units on the R-bus and also set decimal carry if BCD is true. When BCD is false, clock is inhibited to decimal carry. This feature permits saving decimal carry information during all binary operations. Similarly, binary carry is saved during the four binary operations AND, IOR, XOR, and ZTT by connecting AC2 such that when AC2 is false the shift clock is inhibited to the binary carry flip-flop.

In summary, the mode select input BCD performs the following functions:

2. Addresses the proper 128 word set of word lines in ROM No. 1. 2. Enables the T02 and T03 data lines to ROM No. 1 only in BCD mode. 3. Enables clock to decimal carry flip-flop only in BCD mode. 4. Selects binary carry or decimal carry into ROM No. 1 as appropriate. 5. Transfers outputs .SIGMA.0,.SIGMA.1,.SIGMA.2,.SIGMA.3, to A-Register only in BCD mode.

The remaining three ALU function codes select the proper set of word lines in ROM No. 1 to perform the eight binary functions. In addition, the AC2 input performs the following functions.

1. Enables clock to binary carry flip-flop only during the four carry-related binary functions and the BCD comp/add function. 2. In the BCD mode, AC2 causes BCD data bit T00, T02 and T03 to convert to nine's complement form.

The ALU has a total of 15 inputs which include 8 data inputs, 2 clock inputs and 5 microinstructions. Four data output lines are required, and two additional output lines from carry flip-flops are available as qualifier inputs to the microprocessor. The ALU and shift register mnemonics are listed in the following table:

______________________________________SHIFT REGISTERS & ALU BOARD MNEMONICS______________________________________ ##STR157## T-Register to E-Register to ##STR158##TO0 Bit 0 of T-Register ##STR159## T-Bus to E-Register to ##STR160## ##STR161## T-Bus to A/B-Register from Tester ##STR162## T-Bus to A/B-Register from I/O (Board #12) ##STR163## T-Bus to A/B-Register from Processor## (Board #13) ##STR165## Logical "OR" of Three Signals66##AB Status of AB-Flip-Flop AB = 0 A-Reg. Operation AB - 1 B-Reg. Operation ##STR167## A/B Register to ##STR168## ##STR169## Logical "I" to ##STR170## ##STR171## Q-Register to Primary Address Flip-Flop ##STR172## Complement of AB ##STR173## T-Bus to P-RegisterSCK Shift ClockQP0 Qualifier, Bit 0 of P-Register ##STR174## P-Register to ##STR175##QO0 Q-Register Bit 0 ##STR176## Q-Register to ##STR177##RCK ROM ClockQAB Q-Register to AB-Flip-Flop, also clears decimal carry.SCB Set Binary Carry ##STR178## Decimal ArithmeticAC2 ALU Operation CodeQBC Qualifier, Binary Carry ##STR179## Data BusAC1 ALU Operation CodeAC0 ALU Operation CodeT02 Bit 2 of T-RegisterT03 Bit 3 of T-RegisterSDR Signal to Disable ROMsT01 Bit 1 of T-RegisterT-BUS Data BusALU Arithmetic Logic Unit(-) Indicates Negative True Signal______________________________________

The following table gives an example of how the two ALU ROM chips shown in FIGS. 33A-D and 34 can be constructed to implement the above described ALU functions (in this table each 1 represents a low state and each 0 represents a high state): ##SPC63##

MEMORY UNIT

The calculator uses an all semiconductor memory system. Peripheral circuitry is bipolar and the memory consists of n-channel MOS read-only memory (ROM) and p-channel MOS read/write memory (RWM).

Addressing and physical layout of the memory module is done so that the number of words can be increased from 5K in the basic machine to 9K in the largest machine. The smallest increment of memory that can be added is 512 words.

The basic machine contains 9.5K words of memory, organized into 7.5K .times. 16 ROM, and 2K .times. 16 RWM. The 16-bit RWM words are divided into user registers and processor words. The largest machine contains 15.5K words of ROM and 4K words of RWM.

Read/Write Memory

As shown in FIGS. 35-37B memory is made up of 1024 .times. 1, dynamics, read/write memory chips (Intel 1103). These devices are P-channel, MOS using silicon gate technology. To maintain the contents of memory, the device must be refreshed every 2 ms. This is accomplished by performing a read cycle at a given address. On each chip are 32 refresh amplifiers so that each read cycle, 32 cells get refreshed. The entire chip is then refreshed by cycling through the lower 5 address bits and reading each distinct address. The refresh period is 20 .mu.s at least every 2 ms.

Logic levels on all input lines to the RWM chips are 0 to + 16v. This includes the 3 clock lines (chip select, Y-enable or write, and precharge), 10 address lines, and input data. The output data, however, is a current of 600 .mu.a or more into 1K ohms or less. This low level output is wire-or-able with other chips to build larger systems.

Read Only Memory

As shown in Figs, 35 and 38-40 ROM chips are 4096 bit, n-channel MOS arranged 512 .times. 8. The devices are static and consume no power when not enabled. Data is retrieved from the ROMs by pulling the chip enable line from 0 to + 12v (turning the chip on), addressing the desired cells (0 or 4v levels) and selecting which output devices are to be enabled (4v or 0v). The output levels are sufficient to drive one TTL gate directly, and can be wire-or/ed for large systems.

As further shown in FIGS. 41 and 42A-D, each ROM chip comprises six input buffers. These input buffers generate both the input and its complement. On the basis of the 64 possible combinations of the 6-inputs I.sub.0 -I.sub.5, one of the 64 lines in the decoder is selected. The selected line enables one of the vertical lines in the 64 .times. 64 bit storage array. For example, let I.sub.0 - I.sub.5 =0 and .sub.6 - I.sub.8 be don't-cares. This means line X00 (octal) is selected.

The two 8 out of 32 select decoders must choose 16 lines from the 64 horizontal lines selected by the vertical line X00. (The 8 out of 32 select decoder is actually a 2 out of 8 decoder repeated 4 times in each of the sections A - B). The output from four MOS Fet's a, b, c, and d are wire-or/ed. MOS devices a', b', c', and d'are also connected similarly. If I.sub.6 and I.sub.7 =0, horizontal lines 1XX 2XX, 3XX, 5XX, 6XX, 7XX are grounded in each of the four sections A-B. This insures that MOS FET's b, c, d, b', c', and d'are non-conductive. This allows signals on lines 0XX and 4XX to pass into the output sections through transistors a and a'.

The output section contains the output buffer, 1 of 2 decoder, and the output drivers s. The output buffer provides a stage of gain and wire-or-'s 4 lines from the storage array. The 1 of 2 decoder clamps the gates of 2 of the 4 output drivers in each section A-B by enabling either line I.sub.8 or its complement (I.sub.8). This disables 1 of 2 signals coming from the output buffer. The output drivers then can be tied together with line (e ) for a 512 .times. 8 organization.

Each of the above-listed constants and routines and subroutines of basic instructions employed by the calculator is stored in these ROM chips. The sixteen bits of each constant and basic instruction are stored in the 512.sub.10 .times. 8.sub.10 ROM chips by organiziang the ROM chips into 64 .times.64 bit matrices and computing the row and column numbers of each bit of each matrix by operating on each address and the particular bit (15 through 8, or 7 through 0). The column number is computed by subtracting the last two digits of the address from 100.sub.8. For example, the column number of address 000 = 100.sub.8 - 00.sub.8 = 100 = 64.sub.10 and the column number of address 777 = 100.sub.8 - 77.sub.8 = 1. The computation of the row number (referred to as IR in the flow-chart of FIG. 44) can best be described by referring to the flowchart of FIG. 44 and the associated table of FIG. 45. Once the row and column numbers are found it is a simple matter of storing in that location of the matrix that particular bit (i.e., a 1 or a 0). A 0 is stored at a designated location by forming a metal gate to complete a MOS FET device at that location, and a 1 is stored at a designated location by leaving off the metal gate so that a a MOS FET device is not formed at that location.

M-register

As shown in FIGS. 35 and 46A-B included on the M-Register board is the 16-bit Address or M-Register, all chip enable decoding and buffering, and address buffers for both ROM and RWM. The register uses four, four bit, serial in and out, parallel in and out shift Registers. Upon receipt of a TTM instruction from the microprocessor, serial data from the T-Bus is accepted into the M-register. Nothing is done with this data until either a read or write instruction is received, then one of two decoders are enabled. These chip Enable decoders uniquely decode which block of 512 words, either ROM or RWM, is being addressed. If ROM is being addressed, the signal is inverted and amplified to +12v. For RWM the Chip Enable enables a gate, which allows a 16 Volt clock signal to reach the enabled RWM chips. The clock wave-form is generated on the control card.

The dynamic characteristic of the RWM chips, requires that all chips be enabled simultaneously during a refresh cycle, to refresh the entire read/write memory. The buffer circuits in the output of the Chip enable decoders allow the chip select clock to reach all of the RWM chips during refresh but only those being accessed, during a read or write cycle.

Totem Pole outputs or gates with resistor pull-ups are used a buffers for the ROM address lines. Using the totem pole output gates, the effects of crosstalk can be minimized while the resister pullup lifts the address lines above the required 4v level. The nand gates are enabled during a memory cycle so that the ROM address lines are inhibited at a 5v level. The RWM address lines must pull from 0v to + 16v. High voltage, open collector, inverters with discrete transistor pull-ups are used as buffers for all the address bits.

Control

A memory cycle consists of a read or write instruction from the processor accompanied by 12 clock pulses from the shift clock. As shown in FIGS. 35, 46A-B and 47A-B, control uses these pluses and instructions to generate the clocks required by the RWM chips. A synchronous system of flip-flops and gates are used. The outputs from the flip-flops are then buffered to become the required clock signals (Pre-charge, Y-enable, chip select).

Refreshing the read/write memory is also taken care of by the control. An astable multivibrator with a repetition rate of 500 HZ minimum generates a signal which allows a refresh cycle to occur. A flip-flop generates the actual signal (REF), but only if the astable multivibrator signal is high, there is no read or write cycle in progress and the processor signal, CCT, is high. CCT goes high between processor instructions, thus it is known that nothing is going to be interrupted when REF is generated. REF is then buffered by an open collector inverter and given to the processor INH. INH halts the machine and the refresh cycle begins.

The same system used for a memory cycle is used during refresh to again generate the necessary clocks (Precharge and chip select). When the system returns to state 0 and REF is present, a counter is advanced one count. This counter provides the refresh addresses which go to the RWM only if REF is present. When this counter returns to state 0, it causes REF and INH to return to present conditions and the machine continues normal operation.

Another function of the control is to provide for extended memory capability. The control handles any external memory as if it were an extension of the internal memory. From the user's point of view, he does not need to know if an extended memory is connected other than the fact that avaiable memory has increased.

In addition, the control has the provision for extracting information from or loading information into the calculator T-Register through the D-Bus (data bus).

Other signals generated on the control are employed to direct the flow of data in the T-register.

T-register

Data to and form the memory is temporarily stored in the T-register. As shown in FIGS. 35 and 48A-B four 4 -bit, serial in and out, parallel in and out shift registers make up the actual T-register. The registers have a mode control (TMC) which when low, allows serial data flow and when high, allows parallel data flow.

Serial data enters the T-register in the presence of the TTT instruction, and in the presence of a TTS recirculated in the T-register to prevent loss of data.

Parallel data is accepted from eigher ROM or RWM during a read cycle. The ROM data is buffered by NANd gates and the RWM by sense amplifiers followed by the same NAND gates. All 16 bits are read from the ROM simultaneously. Eight bits are read from RWM twice during a read cycle. The eight bits to be written into RWM have their own discrete buffer stage that translates T.sup.2 L logic levels into 16v logic levels used by the RWM.

__________________________________________________________________________MEMORY SYSTEM MNEMONIC TABLE__________________________________________________________________________SIGNALS GENERATED OUTSIDE MEMORY I/O CONNECTOR__________________________________________________________________________ ##STR180## -- Control clock-not, the inverted envelop of SCK.SCK -- Shift clock.MCK -- Memory clock, a continuous pulse train, used by the memory control for timing of the memory and refresh cycles.IOD -- ##STR181##ITS -- ##STR182## ##STR183## -- ##STR184##TTT -- T-BUS to T-Reg, OV = True.T-BUS -- Data on this bus acts as inputs to M & T registers. ##STR185## -- Read memory, negative true. Lasts for 12 clock pulses. ##STR186## -- Write memory, negative true. Lasts for 12 clock pulses. ##STR187## -- Inhibit, negative true. The processor is stopped ##STR188## generates this signal while a R/W memory refresh cycle is present. I/O also generates it. OTHER SIGNALS AT I/O CONNECTOR__________________________________________________________________________ Name Source TOO T-Register TO1 T-Register TO2 T-Register TO3 T-RegisterD-BUS -- Data Bus - external data (extended memory data) enters machine via this bus. ##STR189## -- External Data Transfer gates D-Bus data into machine O.sup.v = True. ##STR190## -- Extended memory busy. Signal provided by extended memory that tells memory control a. Extended memory cycle is complete b. Extended memory is present.SIGNALS GENERATED ON READ/WRITE MEMORY CARDS__________________________________________________________________________RWD(XX) -- Read/Write data. Output from the 1103 memory. ##STR191##OTHER SIGNALS USED BY (RWM)__________________________________________________________________________ Name Source A00-AO4 CONTROL AO5-AO9 M-REG CEN M-REG RWI(XX) T-REG R/W CONTROL PCG CONTROLSIGNALS GENERATED ON T-REGISTER CARD__________________________________________________________________________T00-T15 -- T-register data bits. Used as data into memory T00-T03 are also outputs to the CPU. (4 bit processing)RWI(XX) -- Read/write inputs. T-register data gates to Read/ ##STR192##OTHER SIGNALS USED BY T-REGISTER__________________________________________________________________________ Name Source ROD(XX) ROM TRI CONTROL TSC CONTROL ##STR193## CONTROL TPC CONTROL RWD(XX) R/W MEM RWE M-REGSIGNALS GENERATED ON M-REGISTER CARD__________________________________________________________________________M00-M15 -- M-register data bits. Used to generate address and chip select information. (M00 also is gated out on .sup.- S-BUS by MTS)I00-I07 -- ROM address bits. Decodes down to two bits available at ROM output buffers. ##STR194## -- Selects which RM output buffers are enabled.CS(XX) -- Chip enable, basic machine selects which ROM chips are turned on (+12V - ON)AEN -- Address enable. AEN = RDM + WTMA05-A09 -- Address bits for R/W memory. (+16V & GND)CEN -- Chip select, basic machine a negative true clock which selects which R/W chips are turned on. (+16V & GND) RWE -- ##STR195## is addressed for a machine memory cycle.OTHER SIGNALS USED BY THE M-REGISTER__________________________________________________________________________ Name Source T-BUS PROCESSOR SCK " ##STR196## " ##STR197## " ##STR198## " VLD CONTROL MTS " ##STR199## "SIGNALS GENERATED BY CONTROL__________________________________________________________________________ j -VOR -- A signal generated half way through the memory cycle to disable the active pull up devices on the ROM out- puts.TRI -- T-Register input TRI = (T-BUS) . (TTT) + (TOO) . (TTS) MTS -- ##STR200##AO0-AO4 -- Address bits for R/W memory also used during memory refresh. ##STR201## -- ##STR202##TPC -- T-Register parallel clock. (Strobes in data from memory) only during internal memory read cycle.R/W Read/Write. A clock which left at +16V for a read and clocked to GND during a write. (R/W memory only)PCG -- Precharge. The 3rd 16V clock required by the 1103 R/W memory chips. ##STR203## -- Refresh. OV when the memory is in a refresh cycle. ##STR204## -- Call extended memory. Prevents ROM clock from changing .mu.processor states. Given for all read and write commands. Signal is removed if the memory cycle is not extended memory cycle. If extended memory ##STR205## pleted cycle. O.sup.v = True..sup.- S-BUS -- ##STR206## and sent to processor. 0 = True. ##STR207## -- Inhibit negative true. The processor is stopped ##STR208## generates this signal while a R/W memory refresh cycle is present. I/O also generates it. ##STR209## -- ##STR210## shift serially. ##STR211## -- Extended memory cycle. +5.sup.v signal used to signal extended memory to being its cycle. 0.sup.v = True.VOR -- A signal generated half way thru memory cycle to allow data to flow out of ROM.OTHER SIGNALS USED BY THE CONTROL__________________________________________________________________________ Name Source PROCESSOR# T00 T-REG IOD PROCESSOR ITS " SCO " SCI " ##STR213## " T-BUS " SCK " ##STR214## " ##STR215## " MCK " M00-M04 M-REG AEN M-REG ##STR216## EXTENDED MEMORY D-BUS I-O CONNECTOR ##STR217## EXTENDED MEMORYSIGNALS GENERATED ON ROM BOARD__________________________________________________________________________ROD(XX) -- Read Only DataOTHER SIGNALS USED BY ROM__________________________________________________________________________ Name Source CS(XX) M-REG I00--I07 M-REG ##STR218## M-REG VOR CONTROL__________________________________________________________________________

INPUT-OUTPUT CONTROL UNIT

The input-output control unit allows the calculator to communicate with the internal input, input-output, and output units and with external peripheral devices. As shown in FIGS. 31 A-C and 49 A-D, the input-output control unit is contained on two printed circuit boards, the "control and system clock" board and the "I/O register and gate interface" board. A third board, shown in FIG. 50, is an I/O motherboard providing room for connecting four external interface cards to the calculator.

The internal input, input-output, and output units are distinguished from peripheral devices by the fact that the I/O language set addresses them directly. Hence, each I/O instruction contains an internal peripheral address as part of its makeup. The four internal directly-addressable input, input-output, and output units are the I/O register, the magnetic card reading and recording unit, the output printer unit and display unit.

The external peripheral devices are indirectly addressable and are connected via cable to an interface card which is plugged into the I/O motherhood at the rear of the calculator. The term indirectly addressable is defined here to mean the external peripheral devices are addressed by lines leading from the four most significant bits in the I/O register, thereby requiring an address word to be loaded into the directly addressable I/O register.

I/o control and system clock section

the function of the I/O control and system clock section is to provide control to the I/O register and gate interface section. This is accomplished by use of an I/O instruction set stored in the main memory of the calculator.

The microprocessor causes instructions from the memory unit to be loaded into the T-Register and then to be transferred to the Q-Register. The microprocessor determines the type of instruction and causes the proper execution of the instruction. If the instruction is an I/O type, control is transferred by the microprocessor to the I/O control and system clock section.

The microprocessor remains in a two-state waiting loop while the I/O control section is active. Time in the wait loop is between 0.72 microseconds and 6.5 microseconds.

Bits 5 through 10 from the Q-Register are connected to the I/O control section and remain constant during an I/O instruction execution time. Bits 5 through 8 representing the I/O instruction code are gated to the I/O address flip flops and entered on each clock time while the I/O is inactive. The four outputs of the address flip flops are connected to the address input of a 1 of 16 decoder and represent the starting state address of the I/O instruction to be executed. When the I/O control section is enabled, the input gates passing bits 5 through 8 to the I/O address flip flops are closed and the 1 of 16 decoder enabled. This allows the starting state I/O micro instructions to come from the 1 of 16 decoder. The next state address coming from the closed input gates will be the exit state (1111=17.sub.8) unless modified by reopening the gates to let the original starting state code through or by modifying the output of one or more of the input gates using a wire or connection coming from the 1 of 16 decoder output. This address is sent to the I/O address flip flops inputs and clocked in on the leading edge of the first half clock cycle. The first half clock cycle turns off the 1 of 16 decoder and the address changes. The second half clock cycle enables the 1 of 16 decoder, allowing the next state micro instruction to appear. (See FIG. 51 for the timing described above). This process continues until the exit state is encountered. On the exit state, the I/O Control is disabled and control is returned to the microprocessor.

The I/O instructions involving the transfer of data between the I/O and the CPU (OT, LI, MI), require 16 passes through the same state (1 pass for each of 16 bits). This is achieved by checking the output of a 16-bit down counter and then decrementing after each pass through the state. If the counter indicates 0 has not been reached, it causes the starting state address to be reloaded into the address flip flops by opening the input gates. When 16 passes have been indicated by the counter, the input gates are not allowed to open; however, the next state (1111) is modified by the output of the 1 of 16 decoder through a wire-or connection on the 2nd bit to give state 1101. This address is input to the I/O address flip flops as in the preceeding paragraph.

The above-described operation of the I/O control section is also illustrated and further described in the flow chart of FIG. 52.

Bit 9 is called a hold/clear bit. It allows a clear flag (CLF) to take place or not to take place after execution of the other I/O instructions (STF excepted).

Bit 10 is used in conjunction with the micro instructions PTR and XTR to give control to the I/O.

The I/O control and programmable clock mnemonics are given in the following table:

I/O CONTROL BOARD MNEMONICS______________________________________ ##STR219## Clock Code ZeroCC1 Clock Code OneCC2 Clock Code TwoCC4 Clock Code FourCC8 Clock Code EightCCT Control Clock to TesterCEM Call Extended Memory ##STR220## Clear ControlCLF Clear FlagDRC Data Register ClockEBT Eight Bit TransferEOW End of Word ##STR221## Inhibit Internal OSC ##STR222## Inhibit Clock ##STR223## Inhibit Primary/SecondaryITS Input to S-BusMCK Memory Clock ##STR224## Power on Pulse ##STR225## P-Reg to R-BusQFG Qualifier FlagQ5 Qualifier FiveQ6 Qualifier SixQ7 Qualifier SevenQ8 Qualifier EightQ9 Qualifier NineQ10 Qualifier TenQRD Qualifier ROM DisableRCA ROM Clock AddressRCF ROM Clock Flip FlopSCB Set Carry BitSCK Shift ClockSCT Shift Clock to Tester ##STR226## Service Request AcknowledgeSTC Set ControlSTF Set FlagTCK Tester ClockTTO T-Bus to Output ##STR227## T-Bus to A/B Reg.XTO External OSC ##STR228## A/B Reg. to R-BusNote: ##STR229##______________________________________ I/o register and gate interface section

as shown in FIGS. 49 A-D, the directly addressable I/O register (address 01) is a 16 bit universal parallel in/out, serial in/out) register that is connected to the calculator processor by the serial-in S-Bus and the serial-out T-Bus. Information is passed non-inverted from the A or B registers bit serial to the I/O register with the I/O instruction OTX 01. Sixteen lines connected to the parallel outputs of the I/O register provide data out to the internal input, input-output, and output units and to the external output interfaces. (NOTE: each I/O unit or interface may place only 1 TTL load on the output lines.)

Parallel entry to the I/O register is through 12 party lines connected to the 12 least significant parallel inputs. The input lines are negative true with all input interfaces tying to the lines through open collectors. Care must be taken to insure there is no distrubance to the lines while an interface is inactive. Input information is passed inverted to the A or B register bit serially with the I/O instructions LIX 01 or MIX 01. (The inversion puts positive true information into the A or B register).

Input information is entered into the I/O register in three ways:

a. Service Request Entry by the services request method is controlled by a service inhibit flip flop. When the service inhibit flip flop has been cleared with the I/O instruction CLF 01, a service request may be initiated by returning the SSI (Sevice Strobe Input) party line to ground through an open collector on the interface. This signal causes the parallel inputs to be strobed into the I/O register and sends a request for service (QNR) to the microprocessor. The microprocessor prior to receiving a request for service would have been cycling through various instruction paths and checking for a service instruction paths and checking for a service request after execution of each instruction. Upon receipt of a request for service, the processor interrupts the sequence of instructions it was doing and loads an address into the M-Register which contains the starting address of the service routine. At the same time a signal, SRA (Service Request Acknowledge), turns off the service inhibit flip flop and also sets the single service flip flop which permits only one service interrupt to the processor per service strobe input. The single service flip flop is reset when the service strobe is removed. All lines from an interface using the service request method for entering information are inhibited when the service inhibit flip flop is set. b. Return of Channel Flag After Command is Given to an External Peripheral Device. This method implies the calculator must control the peripheral. That is to say the calculator transmits the indirect address and control enable (CEO) from the I/O Register and gate interface section to the interface with the expectation of information being returned by the peripheral through the interface to the I/O register. Because of this expectation, only limitd instructions may be performed by the calculator while waiting. The service request method must be inhibited during this wait so that input information is not destroyed by another peripheral using service request. When a controlled peripheral, its flag and data are processed at the interface. The signal CFI (Channel Flag In) causes the loading of parallel data from the interface into the I/O register and clears the control enable flip flop so that the CEO signal is removed from the interface. The calculator can interrogate the control enable flip flop with the instructions SFS 01 or SFC 01 to determine when data has been loaded in. c. Giving the I/O Instruction STF 01. The instruction STF 01 as described in (a) sets the service inhibit flip flop inhibiting the service request mode of entry. The STF 01 instruction also causes a parallel load of the input lines into the I/O register.

The output display (address 08) receives information from the I/O register. A 16 bit word is transferred to the I/O register with the instruction OTX 08. The address 08 allows the display enable flip flop to be set with the micro-instruction EOW after the 16th bit has been transferred. The display enable flip flop sends a signal DEN to the display indicating information is ready in the I/O Register. The display enable flip flop is cleared with the I/O instruction CLF 08.

The keyboard operates as described below. 7 bit ASCII assigned keycodes are entered into the calculator by an interrupt process. When a key on the keyboard is depressed the keyboard interface card requests service. Input data is stored along with the request for service on the keyboard interface card. The stored signal for service is gated with the Prevent Interrupt signal through an open collector NAND gate onto the Service Request party line (SSI = Low for service). The giving of Service Request causes the I/O register to be loaded. However, input data from the keyboard interface card is not enabled yet. Thus all status and data inputs are high. This indicates to the CPU that a keyboard is interrupting. An OT .times. 16 instruction is given by the firmware. The select code of 16 enables the gate of the data input lines by a STF 1 instruction and data is loaded into the I/O register. LIA 0 allows data to be taken from the I/O register.

All external peripheral interfaces are indirectly addressed from the four most significant bits in the I/O register. Thus to communicate with an external peripheral, an address (0000 excluded) must be loaded into the I/O register. Data and status will be loaded at the same time if the peripheral is to act as a receiver. If the peripheral is to act as a transmitter, only the address and status need be loaded. Next, the I/O instruction STC 01 sets the Control Enable Out flip flop. This flip flop sends a signal CEO to all external interface slots. The CEO signal and the decoded (from the 4 bit address) address allow the interface to command the peripheral. After the peripheral has responded, information given back to the interface by the peripheral is processed to the I/O register in the manner described above under (b) Return of Channel Flag After Command is Given to an External Peripheral Device.

The I/O register and gating control circuit mnemonics are given in the following table:

I/O REGISTER AND GATE BOARD______________________________________ ##STR230## Control Enable Out ##STR231## Channel Flag InCLF Clear FlagCO0, 1,2,3 Code Out ##STR232## Display EnableDI0, 1,2,3,4,5,6,7 Data InDO0, 1,2,3,4,5,6,7 Data OutDRC Data Register ClockEBT Eight Bit TransferEOW End of WordIOD I/O DataKLS Key Lights StrobeMCR Mag Card Reset ##STR233## Mag FlagMLS Mag Latch StrobePEN Printer Enable ##STR234## Power On Pulse ##STR235## Printer FlagQ0 Qualifier Bit 0Q1 Qualifier Bit 1Q2 Qualifier Bit 2Q3 Qualifier Bit 3Q4 Qualifier Bit 4QFG Qualifier FlagQNR Qualifier Not Request ##STR236## Service InhibitSI0, 1,2,3 Status InSO0, 1,2,3 Status Out ##STR237## Service Request Acknowledge ##STR238## Service Strobe InSTC Set ControlSTP StopSTF Set FlagT-Bus T-BusTTO T Bus to OutputNOTE: ##STR239##______________________________________

As shown in FIG. 53, when addressing a peripheral device, bits loaded into the 4 most significant locations in the I/O register from the CPU constitute the peripheral address code. As part of the output party line system the address code is routed to all I/O interface slots. Each I/O interface card decodes the 4 line address code to a unique single line for use on that particular I/O card. The binary codes 10 through 15 have been reserved for dedicated peripheral addresses which are used by dedicated keys (from the keyboard) and dedicated I/O drivers. Binary codes 1 through 9 are for general use. Code 0 is a non-addressing code and is used in operations that do not involve addressing a specific peripheral. The following table summarizes the address code assignments:

__________________________________________________________________________ADDRESS CODE ASSIGNMENTSADD- 4-BITRESS CODE ASSIGNED PERIPHERAL__________________________________________________________________________15 HHHH TYPEWRITER14 HHHL PLOTTER13 HHLH12 HHLL KEYBOARD & KEYBOARD-LIKE PERIPHERALS11 HLHH10 HLHL9 HLLH GENERAL USE; ONE OF NINE SELECTABLE8 HLLL "7 LHHH "6 LHHL "5 LHLH "4 LHLL "3 LLHH "2 LLHL "1 LLLH " USED ON INTERRUPT I/O INTERFACE CARDS0 LLLL WHEN THE INTERRUPT BECOMES ENABLED__________________________________________________________________________ The general usage codes (1-9) are decoded outputs from a 4 line to 1 of 10 decoder (SN 7442 for example). It is intended that the codes 1 through 9 be jumper selectable. This would allow the user to select a code for his system peripherals or allow him to use more than one of the same peripheral by selecting different address codes.

Since the I/O register is used to communicate with the internal input, input-output, and output units as well as peripheral devices, a given peripheral's address code will appear randomly in the I/O register address field with there being no intention of expecting the peripheral to respond. Therefore, a second piece of information is necessary for the I/O interface card to form a unique signal which will indicate to the peripheral to respond. This second piece of information is control information and is described hereinafter.

The I/O interface cards contain TTL compatible logic for manipulating control and data from the calculator and/or the peripheral. All I/O interface cards which are intended to be used with the calculator must provide storage either on the I/O interface card or in the peripheral. Thus data being transferred from the calculator to the I/O card must be stored at the instant the peripheral is requested to respond. Likewise data coming from a peripheral must be stored until the calculator accepts it. This requirement is important and must be considered on all compatible interface cards.

The calculator can supply up to 100 ma. maximum at +5 volts to each I/O interface card. Power exceeding this absolute maximum must be supplied by the peripheral.

The following table lists the pin assignments for all I/O lines at the plug-in slots on the calculator back plane, as viewed from the rear of the calculator, left to right.

______________________________________EXTERNAL I/O INTEFACEPIN ASSIGNMENTS______________________________________Bottom Top______________________________________ ##STR240## A ##STR241##2 +5 B +53 USED C USED4 USED D 10/205 USED E USED6 DI 0 F DO 07 DO 1 H DO 28 DI 3 J DO 39 DI 2 K DI 110 DO 4 L DI 411 DO 5 M DI 512 DO 6 N DI 613 DO 7 P DI 714 SO 0 R SI 015 SO 1 S SI 116 SO 2 T SI 217 SO 3 U SI 318 CO 0 V CO 119 CO 2 W CO 3 20 ##STR242## X ##STR243## 21 ##STR244## Y ##STR245## 22 ##STR246## Z ##STR247##______________________________________

The chart below lists all I/O lines with brief definitions and specifications and FIG. 50 shows the source and relative relationship of the I/O lines. The output address data lines (Co 0-3) transmit the address code along the party lines to all interface slots. These lines will go high and low according to information being shifted in or out of the I/O Register. At anytime a peripheral is addressed the lines will become steady 1 instruction time (8 .mu.s) before control information is passed to the I/O interface card or before data or status is taken from the I/O interface card and will remain constant until the control information is removed. After the control information is removed, the state of the I/O lines become unpredicatable until the next addressing takes place. Address data coming to the I/O interface card is positive true and each interface may place 1 TTL load on each address line.

__________________________________________________________________________I/O Line Specification ChartName of Voltage No. ofLine Line Definition Direction Load/Loading High Low Lines__________________________________________________________________________1 Address Data Transmits a 4 bit address from the Out 1 TTL (1.6ma) .gtoreq. 2.4v .ltoreq. .4v 4 I/O Register to be recognized by allowed per inter- (CO 0-3) an interface card. (Data = High) face.__________________________________________________________________________2 Device Ready Indicates calculator is ready for in- Out 1 TTL (1.6ma) .gtoreq. 2.4v .ltoreq. .4v 1 formation interchange with an ad- allowed per inter- CLO dressed peripheral. face. (Active State = Low)__________________________________________________________________________3 Device Request Acknowledges receipt of data by a In Loading of 6.6 ma lk re- Must 1e peripheral from the calculator or to the interface sistor driven ##STR248## indicates data is to be input to the card. to + 5v below calculator. use open .4v. (Active Stage = Low) collector__________________________________________________________________________4 Halt Status Indicates stop key has been de- Out 1 TTL (1.6ma) .gtoreq. 2.4v .ltoreq. .4 1 pressed. Allowed/inter- (STP) (Active State = Low) face.__________________________________________________________________________5 Input Data Receives input data to I/O register. In Loading of 6.1ma 1k Res. Driven 12 (DI 0-7, To + 5v .ltoreq..4v SI 0-3) (Data = Low)__________________________________________________________________________6 Output Data Transmits Data from the I/O register. Out 1 TTL (1.6 ma) .gtoreq. 2.4v .ltoreq. .4v 12 (DO 0-7, Allowed/inter- SO 0-3) (Data = High) face.__________________________________________________________________________7 Prevent Inter- Indicates data cannot be entered under Out 1 TTL (1.6 ma) .gtoreq. 2.4v .ltoreq. .4 1 rupt service request. (Interrupt) Allowed/inter- (BIH) (Active State = Low) face__________________________________________________________________________8 Service Re- Indicates a CPU interrupt is to In Loading of 1k Res. Driven 1 quest (Lo) take place to allow data to enter. 6.6ma to + 5v .ltoreq. .4 (SSI) (Active State = Low)__________________________________________________________________________

The output data lines (DO 0-7) output data from the A or B accumulator in 8 bit bytes from the 8 least significant locations in the I/O register to all interface card slots. The logic state is positive true (Data = 1 = High). Each interface card may place 1 standard TTL load on each data line.

The output data status lines (SO 0-3) output status data from the A or B accumulator and are driven from the next four locations above the data out positions in the I/O register. (DO positions = 0 thru 7; SO positions = 8 thru 11). These lines are used for sending additional information to a peripheral. The logic state is positive true. One standard TTL load may be placed on each output data status line. (Special drivers, fast data transfer, and interrupt do not make use of SO 3).

The input data lines (DI 0-7) transmit input data in 8 bit bytes to the 8 least significant bit positions of the I/O register (Locations 0 thru 7) from the I/O interface card. Each Data In line has a 1K pull up resistor to +5 volts and under th party line system must be driven low for a logical 1 from open collector gates on each addressed I/O interface card. The logic state is negative true.

The input data status lines (SI 0-3) receive information from the I/O interface cards and transmit it to location 8 through 11 in the I/O register. Each line has a 1K pull us resistor to +5 volts. These lines are used to provide additional information to the calculator about the state of a peripheral. The logic state is negative true.

The negative true Device Ready output line (CEO) transmits a control signal, which when combined with an address code will initiate a peripheral response on the addressed I/O interface card. Device Ready is controlled by the I/O interface driver and therefore may look different depending upon the driver. For example, when the calculator wishes to transmit data to the I/O interface card or to initiate a peripheral response prior to receiving data from the peripheral, the calculator causes the Device Ready output line to go low and stay low until the peripheral response is over and the calculator receives the signal Device Request (CFI) from the I/O interface card. The Device Ready flip-flop always receives a clear signal whenever the I/O register completes a parallel load.

The Device Request party line CFI when driven low from an open collector gate on the I/O interface card will cause the loading to parallel input information into the 12 least significant locations of the I/O register. The active state of the line is low (negative true).

The peripheral flag, indicating to the I/O interface card the peripheral has received data/control or is ready to input data, is gated through an open collector nand gate onto the Device Request (CFI) party line. The open collector gate is enabled by the I/O interface card's address and Device Ready (CEO). The Device Request line is pulled up inside the calculator by a 1K resistor to +5 volts.

The Device Request (CFI) signal must stay low until Device Ready (CEO) has been cleared (goes high). At this time data transfer has terminated and peripheral's flag and control must be cleared in preparation for the next pass. Since a parallel load in the I/O register causes the Device Ready flip-flop to receive a clear signal, when a Device request (CFI) is entered, a parallel load takes place and afterward Device Ready (CEO) is cleared. The calculator uses Device Request in its general mode of data transfer.

The Halt Status output line (STP) is a line that goes low when the STOP key on the calculator is depressed. It will stay low for the duration of the key depression. One standard TTL load may be placed on this line by each I/O interface card.

The Prevent Interrupt output line (SIH), when low indicates to the I/O interface card that a request for service must not be given to the calculator. One standard TTL load may be placed on this line by each I/O interface card.

The Service Request (Lo) line (SSI), when driven low causes the loading of parallel input information into the 12 least significant locations of the I/O register and causes a CPU interrupt for service. The peripheral's request for service is gated with the Prevent Interrupt (SIH) line onto the Service Request party line through an open collector nand gate. A 1K pull-up resistor to +5 volts is connected to the line inside the calculator.

The general format for all data transfer consists of 8 bit parallel bytes. Other data formats are handled by specially developed drivers, such as the ROM plug-in module employed for driving the typewriter.

The state of a peripheral is generally checked before attempting an output. This is done by first inhibiting the interrupt system. The address of the I/O interface card is shifted into the I/O register. The decoded address code enables the open collector gates on the I/O interface card. The status of the peripheral is passed to the Status In lines and loaded into the I/O register with a I/O instruction issued by the calculator. The I/O register information is transferred to the A or B accumulator and processed. If the peripheral is ready, the output data word consisting of the address code, output status (if necessary) and the eight bit data byte is formed in the A or B accumulator. The output data word is transferred to the I/O register after which the Device Ready (CEO) flip-flop is set. The I/O interface card receives the data, address code and Device Ready and a peripheral response is initiated. The calculator interrogates the state of the Device Ready flip-flop to determine when the I/O interface card has received the information and the peripheral response is done. The peripheral I/O interface card signals the calculator it is done by transmitting the Device Request (CIF) signal to the calculator. The output waveforms are shown in FIG. 54.

Before inputing data from the I/O interface card it is necessary to determine if the peripheral has responded and is ready to input data. After a peripheral response has been initiated, as described previously, the calculator waits for the Device Request (CFI) which loads the data into the I/O register and clears the Device Ready (CEO). The calculator checks the state of Device Ready and when it goes false (CEO = HIGH), the calculator knows data is present in the I/O register and proceeds to shift it into the A or B accumulators for processing. The input waveforms are shown in FIG. 61.

When blocks of data are to be transferred between a peripheral and the calculator, the interrupt is turned off, and transfer rates as high as 100,000 bits/sec may be possible. Before either input or output of a block of data can start, it is necessary for the calculator to check the status of the peripheral to see if it is turned on and ready. The address locations of the I/O register will remain unchanged during the block transfer. A single I/O instruction shifts the 8 bit byte of data from the 8 least signficant locations in A or B to the 8 data locations in the I/O register; gives: Device Ready (CEO goes low) 120 nanoseconds after the shift is completed; and shifts the 8 most significant bits in A or B to the 8 least significant locations in A or B in preparation for the next transfer. (Note the address and status field in the I/O register are not disturbed in the shifting). Device Ready stays true (low) until the peripheral has received the data and is ready for more. The I/O interface card then returns Device Request (CFI) to the calculator. The receiving the Device Request (CFI) to the calculator causes loading of the parallel input party lines into the input status and input data locations of the I/O register, and clears the Device Ready signal (CEO goes high). The logic sense of Device Ready is observed by the calculator and when it goes false (CEO = HIGH) the CPU proceeds to output the next 8-bit byte of data.

If the output I/O interface card is not returning information on the input lines all input lines will be high when the loading, described in the preceeding paragraph, takes place. Therefore, if at the beginning the code in the output status field is being used by the I/O interface card and must remain something other than all high it will be necessary for the I/O interface card to receive the output status from the calculator and return it back to the status inputs so that when Device Request occurs the status field does not get changed in the I/O register.

Input: After determining if the peripheral is ready to start transferring a block of data the calculator turns off the interrupt and shifts the address code into the I/O Register. (The address code remains unchanged during the block transfer). The Device Ready is given (CEO = Low) to the calculator when the 8-bit data byte is ready for input. The Device Request signal causes the input data and status to be loaded into the I/O register and causes Device Ready to go false (CEO = High). The calculator by checking when Device Ready goes false knows the data has been loaded. A single I/O instruction shifts the 8-bit data byte from the I/O register into the 8 most significant locations in the A or B accumulators (Shifting the previous information in A or B 8 places to the right) and causes Device Ready to go true (CEO = Low) 120 ns after the last bit has been shifted into A or B. As before if output status is to be retained on the I/O interface card it must be returned to the I/O register upon each input data transfer. Wave forms illustrating high speed operations are shown in FIGS. 56 and 57.

The calculator software makes use of the interrupt system in two different manners. The first is for remote keyboard like peripherals.

These are those peripherals which logically resemble the calculator keyboard. Only 7-bit ASCII assigned keycodes are recognized by the calculator. The interrupt takes place by the peripheral indicating to the I/O interface card that a request for service exists. Input data must be stored along with the request for service on the I/O interface card or in the peripheral itself. The stored signal for service is gated with the Prevent Interrupt signal through an open collector NAND gate onto the Service Request party line (SSI = Low for service). The giving of Service Request causes the I/O register to be loaded. However, input data from the I/O interface card is not enabled yet. Thus all status and data inputs are high. This indicates to the CPU that a keyboard-like peripheral is interrupting and address code 12 is shifted into the I/O register. The decoded address 12 on the I/O interface card enables the gates to the data in lines and data is now loaded into the I/O register. After the data has been taken from the I/O register address 12 is again put into the I/O register and Device Ready is given as a 360 nanosecond pulse to clear all stored keyboard-like requests for service. This implies all keyboard-like peripherals must be user controlled such that only one interrupt at a time is taking place. The second is nonkeyboard-like peripherals.

These peripherals will output or enter standard ASCII codes for data by using a special ROM (other ROMs may be developed to handle different codes). When a request for service is given to the I/O interface card by a peripheral the request and all data must be stored until serviced by the calculator. The interface card may have any of 9 addresses (1 thru 9). The stored request for service is gated with Prevent Interrupt through an open collector NAND gate onto the Service Request party line. At the time Service Request is recognized address 0 is gated with the stored request for service through an open collector onto an input data or status line which corresponds with the address of the I/O interface card. For example, Data In 0 which is the 1st position in the I/O register represents card address 1, and 2nd position is card address 2, etc. When the I/O register is loaded as a result of the Service Request the interrupting I/O car's address is loaded into the I/O register and Prevent Interrupt enabled (SIH = Low). The contents of the I/O register are processed by the CPU which then shifts the interrupting card's address into the I/O register. The address enables the gates to the data-in lines and data is loaded into the I/O register. After the data is processed by the CPU the interrupting card's address is shifted from the CPU into the I/O register and a 360 nanosecond Device Ready pulse (CEO = Low) given to clear the stored request for service on the I/O interface card, after which the Prevent Interrupt is disabled and the next interrupt allowed to take place. Under this system, multiple interrupts may take place without consequence. Each will be serviced in turn from low to high address position. An interrupting peripheral may also interrupt to request output data from the I/O register. The interrupting process is the same as above except the calculator transmits data rather than receives data. FIG. 8 shows waveforms illustrating the interrupt.

The following table lists the general I/O instruction set and the associated codes.

I/O INSTRUCTION SET__________________________________________________________________________INSTRUCTIONEXECUTION INSTRUCTION CODENAME TIME 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0__________________________________________________________________________STF 9 .mu.s H H H H -- H L H H H H SELECT CDCLF 9 .mu.s H H H H -- H H H H H H "SFC 9 .mu.s H H H H -- H H/C H H H L "SFS 9 .mu.s H H H H -- H H/C H L H L "CLC 9 .mu.s H H H H -- H H/C H L H H "STC 9 .mu.s H H H H -- H H/C H H L L "OT* 15 .mu.s H H H H A/B H H/C L L H H "LI* 15 .mu.s H H H H A/B H H/C L H L H "MI* 15 .mu.s H H H H A/B H H/C L L L H "__________________________________________________________________________

The following describes the function of each I/O instruction with the 5 allowable select codes.

STF <SC> Set the flag. STF is a 240 nanosecond positive true pulse which accomplishes the following with the various select codes.STF 00 Not used by the calculator.STF 01 a. Sets the "Service Inhibit" flip-flop to the true state (SIH= Low; interrupt not allowed). b. Causes parallel input data and status to be loaded into the I/O register.STF 02 Generates a 240 nanosecond positive true MCR pulse.STF 04,08,16 Not used by the calculator.CLF <SC> Clear the flag. CLF is a 240 ns positive true pulse which accomplishes the follow- ing with the various select codes.CLF 00 Not used by the calculatorCLF 01 a. Clears the "Service Inhibit" flip-flop to the false state. (SIH= High; interrupt allowed.) b. Loads address locations in I/O register gister with 0's. (0 = Low) c. Clears "Device Ready" flip-flop (CEO= High).CLF 02 Clears MCR flag flip- flop.CLF 04 Clears PEN flip-flop (PEN = Low).CLF 08 Clears DEN flip-flop (DEN= High).CLF 16 Generates a 240 nanosecond positive true KLS pulseSFC <SC> H/C Skip if flag clear. SFC is a 240 ns positive true pulse which accomplishes the following with the various select codes. If C is given a 240 nanosecond CLF pulse is given after SFC.SFC 00 Causes the next instruction to be skipped if the STOP key has not been depressed.SFC 01 Causes the next instruction to be skipped if Device Ready is true (CEO= Low).SFC 02 Causes the next instruction to be skipped if the MCR flag flip- flop is clear.SFC 04 Causes the next instruction to be skipped if the PEN flip-flop is clear. (PEN= Low).SFS <SC> H/C Skip is flag set. SFS is a 240 nanosecond positive true pulse which accomplishes the following with the various codes. If C is given then a 240 nanosecond CLF Pulse is issued after SFS.SFS 00 Causes the next instruction to be skipped if the STOP key is depressed.SFS 01 Causes the next instruction to be skipped if "Device Ready" is false (CEO= High).SFS 02 Causes the next instruction to be skipped if the MCR flag flip-flop is set.SFS 04 Causes the next instruction to be skipped if the PEN flip-flop is set (PEN = High).CLC<SC> H/C Clear Control. CLCis a 240 nanosecond negative true pulse and is not used by the calculator. If C is given then a 240 nanosecond positive true CLF pulse is given after CLC.STC <SC> H/C Set the Control. STC is a 240 nanosecond posi- tive true pulse which accomplishes the following with the various select codes. If C is given a 240 nanosecond CLF pulse is issued after STC.STC 00 Not used by the calculator.STC 01 Sets the "Device Ready" flip-flop (CEO= Low).STC 02 Generates a 240 nanosecond positive true MLS pulse for the magnetic card reader.STC 04, 08, 16 Not used by the calculator.OTX <SC> H/C Output A or B causes data bits from A or B to be shifted to the I/O register and accomplishes the following with the various select codes. If C is given, a 240 nanosecond CLF pulse is given after OTX is executed.OTX 00 The 8 least significant bits in the A or B register are shifted non-inverted to the 8 least significant locations in the I/O register, and 120 nanosecond after the 8th shift the "Device Ready" flip-flop is set (CEO= Low). The 8 most significant bits are shifted right 8 places and the least 8 significant bits are recirculated to the 8 most significant locations in the A or B registers. The 8 most signi- ficant bits in the I/O register are un- touched.OTX 01 Sixteen bits from the A or B re- gister are shifted non-inverted to the I/O register. The data in A or B recirculates.OTX 02 Not used by the calculatorOTX 04 Same as OTX 01 and in addition, 120 ns after the 16th bit has been shifted nanoseconds printer enable flip-flop is setOTX 03 Same as OTX 01 and in addition, 120 nanoseconds after the 16th bit has been shifted the display enable flip-flop is set.OTX 16 Same as OTX 01 and in addition, 120 nanoseconds after the 16th bit has been shifted the 240 nanosecond KLS signal is generatedLIX <SC> H/C Load into A or B. Loads data bits from the I/O register into the A or B register and accomplishes the following with the various select codes. If C is given, a 240 nanosecond CLF pulse is given after LIX is executed.LIX 00 The eight least significant bits in the I/O register are shifted inverted to the eight most significant locations of A or B, and 120 nanoseconds after the 8th shift the "Device Ready" flip-flop is set (CEO= Low). A or B is shifted right eight places as the I/O register data comes in. The 8 most significant bits in the I/O register are untouched.LIX 01 The 16 bits of the I/O register are trans- ferred inverted to the A or B register. Data in the I/O register is lost.LIX 02, 04, 08, 16 Not used by the calculator.MIX <SC> H/C Merge into A or B. Merges data from the I/O register into A or B registers and accomplishes the following with various select codes. If C is given, a 240 nanosecond CLF pulse is given after MIX is executed.MIX 00 The eight least significant bits in the I/O register are merged with the eight least significant bits of the A or B register and shited to the 8 most signi- ficant locations of A or B; 120 nanosecond the merge takes place the Device Ready flip-flop is set (CEO= Low). A or B shifts right 8 places as the data is merged and shifted to the most significant locations. The 8 most significant bits of the I/O register are untouched.MIX 01 The 16 bits of the I/O register are merged with the 16 bits of the A or B register and contained in the A or B register.MIX 02, 04, 08, 16 Not used by the calculator. Examples of various drivers which transfer data are given below. Example 1: Typical Subroutine to Get Status of I/O Device. Calling Sequence: LDB Select Code JSM StatStat STF 1 Turn off the interrupt system. OTB 1 Load I/O register with select code. STF 1 Load I/O register with status of I/O device. LIA 1 Load A-Register with status information. CLF 1 Turn on interrup RET Return.Example 2: Typical Subroutine to Output an 8 bit character. Calling Sequence: OTA 1 Output 16 bits to the I/O register. STC 1 SFS 1 Loop until I/O flag is set by the JMP *-1 output device. CLF 1Example 3: High Speed Output Where the Calculator is Faster than Output Device. Calling Sequence: ST* I -(Number of 16 bit words to be output) + 1 ST* J Address of first word in the array. LDB SC Select Code JSM OUT2OUT2 JSM STAT Get status of output device RAR 9 and position it. Example 4A: Typical Subroutine to Input an 8-bit Character. Calling sequence is: LDB Select code JSM In . . . Return is made with the data in the A Register.In STF 1 Turn off interrupt system OTB 1 Load I/O register with the select code STC 1, C Pulse the flag & turn interrupt system on JSM STAT Get status off the input device RAR 9 and position it. SAP *-2, C If device is busy then continue to loop SAR 7 else position data bits RET Return. SAP OUT2 If device is busy, continue to loop STF 1 Turn off interrupt system. OTB 1 Output select code LDB 1 ##STR249## LDA J, I Load next data word SEC *+1, C ##STR250## OTA 0 Output 8 bits from A SFS 1 Loop until device sets JMP *-1 flag. SEC *-3, S If E=0 and ##STR251## 8 bits ISZ J Increment array address pointer RIB *-7 Increment count and loop if not finished. CLF 1 Turn on interrupt system RET Return Example 3B: If the Output Device is Faster than the Calculator then n Fewer Instructions can be Used. OTA 0 Output first 8 bits OTA 0 Output second 8 bits. . . . Example 5A: High speed input where the calculator is faster than the input device. Calling sequence: ST* I -(Number of 16 bit words to be input) + 1 ST* J Address LDB SC Select code JSM In2In 2 JSM STAT Get status of input device RAR 9 and position it. SAP In2 If device is busy, continue to loop

All output I/O interface cards which are to be fully interchangeable with both the present and other calculators must have storage either on the I/O interface card or in the peripheral to which information is being transmitted.

Blocks (A) and (B) are the storage latches which store information coming from the I/O register. When the output of gate (C) goes high, data is latched; when low, the outputs of the latch track the inputs. Gates (D) decode the address code (14 = 1110) and pass it positive true to gate (E). Device Ready (CEO) is also passed positive true to gate (E). Gates (H) are open collector and pass status and Device Request (CFI) onto the input party lines.

An example of a calculator output would be: output the address 14 which enables status gates (H) and see if the power is on. If on, output address, status, and data to gates (A), (B), and (D). The output of (C) is low allowing data and status to pass. Next give Device Ready (CEO = Low); this enables flip-flop (G), clocks flip-flop (F) which causes (A) and (B) to latch, and sends control to the peripheral. The peripheral acknowledges receipt of control by returning FLAG (FLAG = High) in a busy state this continues to keep (A) and (B) latched and clears control flip-flop (F). When the peripheral is done acting, the FLAG is returned to the not busy state (FLAG = Low) which clocks flip-flop (G) and causes output at (C) to go low enabling (A) and (B). The output of (G) drives the CFI gate which has been enabled from (E) and CFI goes low. CFI is received by the calculator which responds by returning CEO high. This causes the output of (E) to go low, clearing flip-flop (G) and returning CFI high. This completes 1 output cycle.

All input I/0 interface cards which are to be fully interchangeable with both the present and other calculators must have storage either on the I/O interface card or in the peripheral from which information is being received.

Block (A) is used to store information coming from the peripheral. (B) stores status coming from the I/O register which may be needed by the peripheral. The output tracks the input whenever the enable on the latch is low. Block (C) decodes the address code into one of 10 addresses which are jumper selectable. An example of a calculator input would be as follows: the address code would be decoded by (C); the calculator would load status through the open collector input status gates (D). If the peripheral is on and ready, the address code and output status (if necessary) would be sent to (B) and (C). The decoded address is passed, positive true, to gate (E). The enable at (B) is low so that status is passed to the peripheral. The Device Ready is given (CEO = Low) and comes to (E) positive true. The output of (E) clocks flip-flop (F) through gate (H). The output of (F) gives control to the peripheral and also enables (A) to receive data. The peripheral responds in a busy state (FLAG = High). When data is ready to be input the FLAG is driven low. Data is latched when the FLAG goes low in (A). Also when FLAG goes low, (G), having been enabled by the output of (H), is clocked driving (J) from its Q output. (I) is enabled by the output of (H) and so CFI is driven low. Data is loaded into the I/O register from open collector gates (I) and CEO driven high as a result of the calculator receiving CFI. This clears flip-flop (G) and disables the input gates (I) completing an input cycle.

FIG. 59 illustrates the logic required on an I/O interface module to interface the calculator with an external X-Y plotter.

FIG. 60 illustrates the logic required on an I/O interface module to interface the calculator with an external line printing unit.

FIG. 61 illustrates the logic required on an I/O interface module to interface the calculator with an external modem for transmitting and receiving information via telephone lines.

FIG. 62 illustrates the logic required on an I/O interface module to input or output any eight-bit code.

A power preset circuit is employed on interface modules using the interrupt system to prevent an interrupt when the peripheral power is turned off or on. This can usually be done by sensing the peripherals' +5 volts and presetting when the voltage drops below 3 to 4 volts.

An example of a calculator interrupt would be as follows: (B) may be clocked at any time storing the data is (E) and (F). The calculator enables the interrupt to take place by making Prevent Interrupt false (SIH = High) and outputting address 0 to decoder (L). (G) is enabled when SIH goes high through gate (M) causing SSI to be driven low. The calculator responds by loading the I/O register. Gates (H) are inhibited by gates (N) and (J) and gate (K) is enabled because of address 0, thus DI0 is the only true signal loaded into the I/O register. The calculator interprets this to mean the I/O interface card at address 1 has caused the interrupt. The calculator outputs address 1 to the decoder which enables gates (H) with (N) and (J) and then loads the data. After the data is stored the calculator outputs address 1 and sends Device Ready (CEO = Low) as a 360 nanosecond pulse which is used to clear (B) through gates (O) and (D). This completes an input cycle.

KEYBOARD INPUT UNIT

The keyboard input unit is shown in FIG. 63 and is designed around a 128-position matrix. Each position is scanned sequentially. When a key is depressed, the counter, which drives the scanner, is stopped. The address of the 7-bit counter corresponds to the ASCII code of the key depressed. The entire scan period is 4 milliseconds. Two key rollover is incorporated in this design.

When a key is depressed, SSI is generated unless inhibited by either SIH or KLS. As soon as the service request is acknowledged, the CPU will give a select code of 12 which will gate the ASCII keycode onto the data lines.

Another feature of this keyboard is automation repeat. If a key is depressed for more than 1.5 seconds, the keycode will be entered repeatedly at a rate of 15 entries per second until the key is released.

OUTPUT DISPLAY UNIT

Referring to FIGS. 72A-B and 73A-B, there is shown the hardware associated with the calculator display. The display comprises a single register 400 of 32 alpha-numeric characters, each character position of which is a seven row by five column matrix of light emitting diodes (LED). In addition to the display hardware illustrated, the complete calculator display system comprises a firmware display routine which is detailed on page 35 of the basic system firmware listing and an I/O register shown in FIGS. 49A-D. The firmware display routine delivers a 16-bit word to the display circuitry. Four of these bits 402 and 404 are decoded into one of 16 character positions. The remaining 12 bits 422 are two six-bit ASCII coded characters which are alternatively decoded in ROM 430 into their row and column information. A seven-bit data latch 432 is provided to allow the ROM 430 to decode both the nth and the (n = 16)th characters which are displayed simultaneously.

An assymmetrical clock circuit 426 drives input gating circuitry 436 and counter-decoder circuitry 434 to decode the row information of the nth and the (n +16)th characters. Protection circuitry 428 is provided to blank the display in case of failure of either logic signal DEN 424 or CA0 438.

Three-bit column data 410 and three of the four-bit character position bits 402 are applied to a one-of-four decoder circuit 420. The output of circuit 420 is fed to the column drivers 418. Four columns eight emitting diodes 400 are driven by each of the 40 column driver. Thus, all 160 columns of the display can be scanned. The remaining character position bit 404 enables alternate sections of row drivers 416 to complete the one-of-16 character position decoding.

MAGNETIC TAPE CASSETTE READING AND RECORDING UNIT

The magnetic tape cassette reading and recording unit is shown in the block diagram of FIG. 64 and in the detailed schematic diagram of FIGS. 65-69. Operation of the magnetic tape cassette reading and recording unit is largely automatic. It is only necessary to specify the type of operation to be performed and the limits desired. The commands for doing this may either be entered directly from the keyboard input unit or as part of a program. The calculator then determines the necessary commands required to cause the magnetic tape cassette reading and recording unit to perform the desired operation.

Several modes of operation are possible. Secure and unsecure programs, data, and sets of user definable key definitions may be recorded on the magnetic tape and subsequently loaded back into the calculator.

Referring now to FIGS. 64 and 65, the operation of the interface portion of the magnetic tape cassette reading and recording unit will be described.

I. address Decoder

IC 6 and IC 7 are used to detect a select code of 10 when the cassette is accessed. When a select code of 10 is detected, and the control line CEO is true the cassette is enabled.

Ii. enabling Input Data Bits

The open collector nands in IC 2 and IC 3 allow the input data bits (ID 0 through ID 7) to be gated onto the calculator input bus when the card is selected by the address and control line as described in Section I.

Iii. enabling Input Status Bits

The open collector nands in IC 1 allow the input status bits (IS 0 through IS 3) to be gated onto the calculator input bus when a select code of 10 is given and the control line is true.

Iv. flag

D type flip-flop 10 is the flag flip-flop. It is held cleared except when the I/O card is selected as described in Section I. When the I/O card is selected the flip-flop is set by the trailing edge of the flag pulse from the cassette. In addition, the flag flip-flop is held preset (at pin 5) when the cassette door is open, clear leader is detected, or an interrupting character is read. A simultaneous preset and clear results in a true output from the flip-flop. The flag flip-flop signal is gated to the calculator (CIF, pin 2-m) by the open collector nand gate only when the I/O card is selected.

V. interrupt

D-type flip-flop 13 is the interrupt flip-flop. It is held cleared whenever the I/O card is selected as described in Section I. The interrupt is allowed only if the cassette is in control mode (pin 2-3). An interrupt signal comes whenever the cassette goes onto clear leader, the cassette door is opened, or an interrupting character is read. An interrupting character is a character with data bits 2, 3, 4, 5 all ones, read when the cassette is in control mode. When the signal Service Interrupt Inhibit is false (SIH = 1, pin 2-1) the interrupt signal is gated through IC 4 pin 6 and 8 to the calculator. The data bit SI 1, (Pin 1-4) is pulled low to tell the calculator the address of the peripheral which interrupted.

Referring to FIGS. 64, 66A-14 B, and 66' the operation of the control logic portion of the magnetic tape cassette reading and recording unit will be described.

I.1 power on Preset

Transistor Q1 and diodes CR1 and CR2 are part of the power on circuit which makes sure that the cassette powers up in the proper modes.

I.2 control Signal

The control signal (YCNT on pin 11) comes from the Interface card as a positive true signal telling the Logic card to process the command on the output lines. The positive going edge of the control signal fires the one-shot (IC 7) giving a 300 nsec. control Pulse used to strobe storage elements.

I.3 decode and Storage of Commands

The 1-of-10 open collector decoder (IC 19) is strobed on its D input by the control pulse. (See Section I.2) On the A, B, and C inputs of the decoder are output status bits OS0 through OS2. Those output status bits contain commands for the transport as follows:

______________________________________OS2 OS1 OS0 Command______________________________________(Write) (Reverse) (Fast)0 0 0 Read-Forward-Slow0 0 1 Read-Forward-Fast0 1 0 Read-Reverse-Slow0 1 1 Read-Reverse-Fast1 0 0 Write-Forward-Slow1 0 1 STOP1 1 0 Continue Present Command1 1 1 Continue Present Command______________________________________

Output status bit 3 (OS3) indicates if the cassette should be in control mode or data mode. Control mode is explained in Section I.12.

If when the decoder is strobed, the command on the output status lines is other than STOP or CONTINUE, the open collector wired-or decoded outputs 0 through 4 are low for the width of the control pulse. This wired-or output pulse strobes the command on the output status bits into the Quad Latch, IC20, and preset the run flip-flop 15-2. The command on the run lines are gated off the logic card to the motor control card, and cassette motion begins.

If the command is STOP, the decoder output 5 (pin 6) goes low, which clears both the run flip-flop (15-2) and the Quad Latch (IC20). If the command is CONTINUE, both the Quad Latch and the run flip-flop remain unchanged.

The run flip-flop and the Quad Latch are also cleared by power on preset.

I.4 run Flip-Flop

The run flip-flop (1502) is preset by the issuing of a command as described in Section 6.3. It is cleared by an interrupt signal from the I/O card, a stop command, power on preset, or a cassette not being in place. The run flip-flop is also cleared by the clear leader signal on its clock input, whenever the cassette runs into clear leader. Since the clock input of the flip-flop is edge sensitive, the transport is stopped only when it first goes onto clear leader, and tape motion is allowed by the issuing of a new command even when on clear leader.

The Schmidt-triggered gates 1-1 and 1-2 are used to filter noise on the interrupt, clear leader, and cassette in place lines.

I.5 rewind Mode

D type flip-flop 15-1 is the rewind flip-flop. It is held preset as long as the rewind button is held in. It is cleared by clear leader detection, cassette not in place, power on preset, stop command, or on interrupt from the I/O card. The rewind flip-flop is also cleared through its clock input, whenever a new command is issued. A simultaneous preset and clear results in the Q output of the flip-flop being true. When the transport is stopped (flip-flop 15-2 cleared) and the rewind flip-flop is set the output of gate 16-3 will be true, which will force the NOR gates 17-1, 17-2, and 17-3 to 0 outputs. These outputs will cause the tape to be rewound in high speed reverse to clear reader, unless the rewind flip-flop is cleared as described above.

I.6 transport Status

Input status bits; YIS3 (pin F), YIS2 (pin 6), YIS1 (pin E), and YIS0 (pin 5), reflect the status of the transport as follows:

Yis3 -- negative true, cassette in place Yis2 -- positive true, clear leader detected Yis1 -- negative true, writing on cassette permitted Yis0 -- positive true, control mode I.7 internal Clock

The internal clock used for writing data is generated by the two one-shorts IC6 and IC13. The clock is not symmetrical, but IC6 is true for 133 .mu.sec and IC13 is true for 220 .mu.sec. Padding resistor R10 is then used to adjust the total time of 333 .mu.sec for a 3KC clock rate. The internal clock is enabled only when the cassette command is write as detected at pin 5 of IC13.

I.8 nine Bit Shift Register

A nine bit shift register is made from IC3, IC4, and flip-flop 5-2. In write operations this register is loaded parallel by a pulse from gate 16-1, and then shifts the data serially to IC3 pin 10 for writing on the tape. In read mode the data is clocked from the tape, serially, to IC5 pin 12 where it is serially loaded into the register. From the shift register it is read as parallel data, at the flag, by the calculator.

I.9 data, Clock Mark Sequence

During write operation a write clock, a write data, and a write mark signal are sent from the logic card. During read operations a read clock, a read data, and a read mark signal are received by the logic card. The data lines are NRZ; clocked by the appropriate clock. When clock pulses and marker pulses are properly sequenced they constitute a character. The sequence is 9 data bits per character, separated by marks.

Mark - 9 data bits - mark - 9 data bits - mark.

______________________________________BIT-MARK-SEQUENCE CODEThree types of information Track______________________________________ "1" A ##STR252## B ##STR253## "0" A ##STR254## B ##STR255## Mark A ##STR256## B ##STR257##______________________________________ 10 bit character M d.sub.7 d.sub.6 d.sub.5 d.sub.4 c d.sub.3 d.sub.2 d.sub.1 d.sub.0 m 8 data bits 1 marker 1 control bit I.10 divide by 10 Counter During Write

The divide by 10 counter (IC14) is used to sequence the clock and mark pulses during write (See section 6.9 for a sequence description). When the counter is at counts 0 through 8 the internal clock pulses generated by IC6 and IC13 are gated through gate 18-4 from where it goes off the card as the write clock, and through gate 18-2 to shift the shift register. When the divide by 10 counter is at count 9, the internal clock pulse is inhibited at gate 18-4, but is enabled at gate 10-2 from where it passes off the board as a write mark pulse. Since the counter wraps around from count 9 to count 0, we get the repeating sequence, marker - 9 bits - marker.

Each time the counter goes to 9, a character is completed and the write mark pulse, in addition to going off the board, is gated through gate 12-3 to make up a flag, telling the calculator that the character has been written. The calculator will then send another parallel character to the shift register and the sequence will be repeated.

Special conditions prevail for the writing of the first of a string of characters. When the transport goes from read to write mode, flip-flops 8-1 and 8-2 are set in their edge sensitive clock inputs. Flip-flop 8-2 presets the counter to count 9, making sure the sequence begins with a mark pulse. The same flip-flop 8-2 is cleared by this first mark pulse, after which the counter continues its wrap-around sequence. Flip-flop 8-2 being set, inhibits this first leading write mark pulse from passing through gate 12-3 and becoming a flag. Flip-flop 8-2 is cleared by the first write pulse, after which the write sequence continues as normal.

I.11 divide by 10 Counter During Read

Only a sequence of 9 data bits followed by a mark is to be recognized as a character during read. The divide by 10 counter is used to detect this sequence.

Whenever the transport is stopped, flip-flop 5-1 is held preset. The output of flip-flop 5-1, presets the counter to a count of 0. Flip-flop 5-1 is cleared with the leading edge of the read data clock and the counter counts on the trailing edge. The read data pulses are counted by the counter and also pass through gate 18-2 to shift the shift register. When the counter has counted 9 read pulses, its count of 9 puts a true signal on pin 13 gate 19-1. If a read mark pulse comes next, pin 1 of gate 19-1 if true for the width of the read mark pulse. These two signals make up part of the flag signal which tells the calculator a valid character is in the shift register. The trailing edge of the read marker pulse, sets flip-flop 5-1, which presets the counter to 0 and the sequence is ready to be repeated.

If a marker is read when the counter is at a count other than 9; no flag is given, flip-flop 5-1 is set, and the counter is preset to 0. If 10 read pulses come in a row, the counter wraps around to 0 and no flag is given. Thus nothing but 9 read clock pulses, followed by a read mark pulse, generates a flag and is recognized as a character.

I.12 control Mode and Flags

Each character contains 8 data bits. The middle bit of the 9 bit character is a control bit. If the center bit is a 1, the character is a control character. If the center bit is a 0, the character is a data character. If the transport is in control mode during write, the center bit is loaded as a 1 at IC4 pin 5, and the character is written as a control character. In data mode the center bit of each character written is 0.

If the transport is reading in control mode, flags are sent to the calculator only when a control character is in the shift register. If the transport is in control mode, and a data character is in the shift register, the read flag is inhibited at IC9-1 pin 2. This IC9-1 pin 2 is always true, except when the cassette is in control mode and the center bit of the shift register is 0. In data mode, flags are sent to the calculator for both data and control characters.

The flag circuitry on the interface card is trailing edge sensitive, making sure the character is completely written or completely read before the calculator is flagged.

Referring now to FIGS. 64 and 68A-B, the operation of the read/write portion of the magnetic tape cassette reading and recording unit will be described.

I. general Description

The read/write board has two main functions. In the WRITE mode it encodes bit serial data into two-channel Bit-Mark-Sequence (BMS) data to be fed to the head driver and written on tape.

In the READ mode it decodes the two-channel analog BMS data from the head preamplifier into clock, mark, and bit-serial data pulses from the tape signals.

Ii. write mode

When Write Permit is true (YWPT = 1) and Write Command is true (YWTC = 1) then Write Enable is true (YWEN = 1; Q7 on) and writing on the tape is allowed. The 3-input NAND gates of IC2 are used to encode the bit-serial data (YWDT) into BMS. Logic 1's (YWDT = 1) are written on Channel A. Logic 0's (YWDT = 0) are written on Channel B. A mark is written when Write Mark is true (YWMK = 1). The data and marks are clocked in my means of the Write Clock (YWCL).

Iii. read mode

The two amplifiers of IC6 and their associated circuitry comprise two threshold detectors that convert the analog signals from the head (ARA, ARB) to digital signals. The amplifiers switch between their positive and negative saturated states. The thresholds are adjusted so that the amplifiers switch states when the analog signal is approximately 30% of its peak value measured near BOT, moving forward.

The head signal amplitude is proportional to tape speed. Therefore, the thresholds are adjusted high for fast tape motion and low for slow tape motion by switching Q1 and Q2 with the Fast Command (NFTC) line. The positive and negative references for the thresholds are derived from the 12 volt power supplies.

The two channels of digital data are gated to the decode circuitry through IC1. The decoder consists of IC3, IC5, IC8, and IC9.

IC8 is a 0.5 .mu.s one-shot that is fired once for each data bit or mark that is gated in from the threshold detectors. This one-shot pulse comprises a read clock signal that is gated to NRCL by IC5 when the bit associated with the pulse is not a mark.

IC9-1 is a flip-flop that serves three functions. First, it provides a Read Mark pulse (YRMK) whenever a mark is read from the tape. Second, it controls IC5 to allow the one-shot pulse to appear as Read Clock (NRCL). Third, it controls IC3 and IC5 to allow data to be gated through to the data output flip-flop, IC9-2.

Referring now to FIGS. 64 and 68A-B, the operation of the motor control portion of the magnetic tape cassette reading and recording unit will be described.

I'. speed Reference

Resistors R1, R2, and R3 are used to generate a reference voltage proportional to the desired motor speed. The voltage seen at the positive input of U3 is about 3.0 volts for low speed and 8.0 volts for high speed.

Ii'. comparator-Amplifier

Op Amp U3 compares the speed reference with a signal representing the actual motor speed (see Item IV' below). The difference signal is amplified and fed to the driver circuitry which increases or decreases the drive voltage available to the motor.

Resistor R8 and capacitor C1 create negative feed back around U1, resulting in a DC gain of 26 db and a single pole at about 100 Hz. This tailors the servo loop frequency response to provide stable operation with rapid error correction.

Iii'. motor Driver

Diode D1 shifts the DC drive level by about 7 volts. Transistors Q1, Q2, and the Motor Pass Transistor (located on the Regulator Board) furnish current gain to drive the motor. Resistor R7 ensures turnoff for the Motor Pass Transistor. Transistor Q3 is used to dynamically brake the motor if its speed is greater than desired.

Diode D3 reduces the maximum voltage at the motor when on clear leader. This voltage limit effectively reduces the motor torque, preventing damage to the motor, friction drive, or tape cassette should the tape be pulled against the hub. Diode D2 prevents damage to Q1 during this reduced torque condition.

Iv'. back-EMF Amplifier

The motor terminal voltage is composed of two parts -- the IR voltage drop in the motor armature resistance, and the motor generated voltage, or Back-EMF. Back-EMF is directly proportional to motor speed, and is used as the motor speed feedback signal.

Sense resistor R9 produces a voltage proportional to the motor armature current, and therefore proportional to the IR voltage drop. Op amp U4 and resistors R10 thru R14 subtract the IR voltage drop from the motor terminal voltage, resulting in a voltage proportional to the motor speed. This signal is about 3.0 volts for low speed and 8.0 volts for high speed; it is fed back and compared with the reference voltage, as described in Item II' above.

The process of sensing the IR voltage drop, as described above, is accurate only for a single winding temperature. Because lower armature resistances (caused by lower temperatures) could cause instability in the servo, this perfect-compensation point is placed at the bottom of the operating range -- 0.degree. C in this case. Increasing temperature causes reduced load regulation (greater motor current causes reduced speed), but servo operation remains stable.

V'. motor and Solenoid Selector

The selector circuitry activates the proper motor and solenoid. When in Run Fwd mode, Q4, Q5, and Q8 are saturated on; in Run Rev mode Q6, Q7, and Q9 are saturated. When in Stop mode, all devices are off.

Referring now to FIGS. 64 and 69, the operation of the interconnect portion of the magnetic tape cassette reading and recording unit will be described.

I. connection From Transport to Mother Board

The main function of the Interconnect Board is to electrically connect the transport mechanism to the Mother Board. There are four groups of wires coming from the transport: the Motor wires, the Solenoid and Switch wires, the Head Board wires, and the Photosensor wires. Each group of wires is terminated on a Pin Board which plugs into the Interconnect Board; this partitioning allows for ease of assembly and service.

Ii. clear Leader Signal

Most of the circuitry on the Interconnect Board is used to generate the Clear Leader signal. The photosensor assembly on the transport contains an incandescent lamp and a photoconductive cell. When magnetic tape is over the photosensor, no optical coupling occurs, resulting in a high photoconductor impedance. When clear leader is over the photosensor, light is reflected off the light colored plastic of the cassette and onto the photoconductor, resulting in a low photoconductor impedance.

Integrated circuit U1 and resistors R4, 5, and 6 form a comparitor which switches when the photoconductor impedance is approximately 25k.OMEGA.. Capacitor C5 filters the output of U1 to eliminate false signals of less than 5ms. duration; transistor Q1 amplifies this signal.

Under certain conditions when the tape stops or changes direction a tape loop may form over the photosensor; a reflection can result which causes the same photoconductor impedance as a clear leader. IC's U2, 3, and 4 are used to prevent a tape loop from giving a false clear leader indication. Flip-flop U4 stores the clear leader signal; this flip-flop may be turned "on" when the cassette has been running on clear leader for the duration of one-shot U2 (85 ms). This delay period ensures that any loop has been pulled out of the tape, preventing reflection problems.

A mag tape (Clear Leader Not) indication is always accurate; therefore it directly resets flip-flop U4. The gates tied to the preset of U4 force the flip-flop on during power turn on and when the cassette loader is open; if the tape is, in fact, on mag tape, this signal persists after preset is removed and resets U4.

Iii. solenoid Turnoff

Diodes D1 and D2 and resistor R1 limit the peak solenoid flyback voltage during turnoff to about 24 volts. This also provides rapid solenoid dropout by applying up to -12 volts across the solenoid during turnoff.

Iv. motor Padding Resistors

Resistors R2 and R3 are selected to trim a given motor to between 10.30 and 10.60 ohms effective armature resistance. Capacitors C1 and C2 are used to suppress motor brush noise.

V. cassette Sense Switches

Resistors R11 and R12 and pullup resistors for the mechanical cassette sense switches. Cassette In (positive true) and Write Permit (positive true) are the signals generated.

Power supply

the power supply system employed in the calculator is constructed as shown in FIGS. 74 and 75A-B. As shown in FIGS. 75A-B, a centertapped transformer secondary is connected to supply the unregulated DC voltages indicated. Referring to FIG. 75A, the AC voltage from the transformer is rectified by diodes 454 and 456 and filtered by capacitor 478. The output of this rectifier/filter circuit is nominally 19 volts DC at 2.7 amps with a 2 volt peak-to-peak ripple. Transistors 440 and 442 serve as a switch to connect the 5-volt output bus to the 19 volt unregulated supply through inductors 450 and 452. Diode 444 serves to clamp the input of inductor 450 to ground when transistors 440 and 442 are switched off. Current flow in inductors 450 and 452 is substantially constant and equal to the load current.

Loss in high current transistor 440 is minimized because it can be completely saturated. Loss in driver transistor 442 is minimized because it can also be saturated. Resistor 446 limits the maximum drive current to transistor 440. Losses in resistor 446 can be minimized by proper positioning of the tap on inductor 450 consistent with transistor parameters and circuit requirements.

Integrated circuit 448 is a linear differential amplifier to drive Q1 and Q2. Any differential amplifier with sufficient voltage capability and bandwidth will work. Since the amplifier employed is linear, R7 and R4 have been included in the circuit to provide sufficient hysteresis for reliable switching. This hysteresis stabilizes the switching frequency and thus stabilizes the switching losses.

Because hysteresis has been added to the circuit, a significant ripple signal (at switching frequency) must be present on the feedback signal to the amplifier. This need for a ripple signal limits the amount of capacitance that can appear between the output of inductor 450 and ground. Inductor 452 serves to isolate this point from the rest of the system. The amount of capacity that can appear between the output of inductor 452 and ground is essentially unlimited and significantly reduces power supply ripple, and greatly improves response to load transients.

The second winding of inductor 452 is a path for the feedback from the remote sensing. The required ripple signal is added to the feedback signal by transformer action in inductor 452.

The power supply also includes an overvoltage crowbar circuit comprising transistor 458, diode 460, and resistor 462 and a short circuit shut-down circuit (using transistor 464). In the event that the +5 volt bus is grounded, or the crowbar is triggered, transistor 464 saturates and locks integrated circuit 448 off.

The resistor 466 makes a current generator of integrated circuit 448. Resistors 468 and 470 discharge the bases of transistors 450 and 452, respectively. Integrated circuit 472 and its associated components generate a power-on-pulse, POP, to initialize the instrument. Integrated Circuit 448 is referenced and powered from an external +12 volt supply. Powering the IC from +12 rather than the unregulated +19 reduces power dissipation in IC 448.

The +12 volt supply of FIGS. 75A-B references the -12, +5, and +16 supplies directly. The +12 amplifier 448 may be biased either from the unregulated supply for the +12 volt supply or from the operating +16 volt supply. Diodes 474 and 476 determine the appropriate source. This provides a greater power supply margin for the +12 volt supply.

All supplies except the +20 volt supply are current limited. All supplies except the +20 volt supply are crowbar protected against over-voltage.

TYPEWRITER INTERFACE

This interface couples the Facit-Odhner model 3841 output typewriter to the calculator.

The unit mounts directly on the back of the typewriter. Communications with the calculator are made through about five feet of cable which is terminated by the I/O plug containing a board for buffering and some logic.

Referring to FIGS. 76A-82, characters from the calculator appear on the data lines as ASCII codes. These codes are recorded by a ROM into the six bit Facit typewriter code for the 46 type bars, and one bit for upper case shift. Functions such as space, tab, line feed, etc. are recoded for easy recognition in the interface since each function must be driven by a separate line. A data latch after the ROM holds codes for processing. If new data arrives during this processing, the two codes are compared to determine if they both drive the same type bar and if they are both numbers. Non-repeating numbers can be typed at 14.5 characters per second, otherwise typing speed is 12 characters per second (reduce these speeds 17% for 50HZ operation). Codes in the latch are gated to the program solenoids or the function solenoids by the control logic.

To understand the coding, notice that two blocks of codes on the Facit typewriter code map are empty. If all function codes are put in these blocks, they can be identified by control logic by testing for (6.4). Each function code puts a 1 on one of five lines and this line opens the correct solenoid gate. Bit 8 is used to discriminate between two sets of function gates. In the case of a program solenoid code, bit 8 identifies numerals.

The control clock is provided by a synchronizing pulse which is generated in the typewriter by a vaned wheel attached to the end of the main drive shaft. The vanes interrupt a light beam. When a type cycle is initiated, a modulo eight counter counts synchronizing pulses and the count is decoded by a 1-of-8 decoder. At each of the eight states, comtinational logic can enable solenoid gates, set or clear flag flip-flops or change the counter to state zero, or state 6, or inhibit the counter.

The tables below contain a guide for interpretation of bit pattern data as well as the actual bit patterns for ROM No. 10 and ROM No. 11 as shown in FIG. 81.

INTERPRETATION OF BIT PATTERN DATA

(Bipolar ROM of FIG. 81)

1. format

the bit pattern information is in the following format:

X.sub.1 x.sub.2 x.sub.3 -x.sub.5 x.sub.6 x.sub.7 b b x.sub.10 x.sub.11 x.sub.12 x.sub.13 b x.sub.15 x.sub.16 x.sub.17 x.sub.18 b...x.sub.45 x.sub.46 x.sub.47 x.sub.48 a. x.sub.1 x.sub.2 x.sub.3 -- three digits indicating the address (decimal) of the first word of that line. *1 B. x.sub.5 x.sub.6 x.sub.7 -- three digits indicating the address of the last word in that line. *1 C. x.sub.9 x.sub.10 x.sub.11 x.sub.12 -- four characters indicating the output states of the first word of that line (corresponding to address X.sub.1 X.sub.2 X.sub.3). *2 D. x.sub.15 x.sub.16 x.sub.17 x.sub.18 through X.sub.40 X.sub.41 X.sub.42 X.sub.43 indicate successive output states. *2 E. x.sub.45 x.sub.46 x.sub.47 x.sub.48 -- four characters indicating the output states of the last word of that line (corresponding to address X.sub.5 X.sub.6 X.sub.7). *2 F. b = blank or space between group of characters. *1. Addresses are the digital equivalent of the binary address A.sub.7 A.sub.6 A.sub.5 A.sub.4 A.sub.3 A.sub.2 A.sub.1 A. Where a low input address equals a binary 0 and a high input equals a binary 1. *2. Groups of output states are listed O.sub.4 O.sub.3 O.sub.2 O.sub.1 respectively. 2. TRUTH TABLE

Logic level definition

L -- output Low (Logic 0) H -- output High or Open Collector (Logic 1) X -- don's Care -- Output may be High or Low ##SPC64##

Claims

1. Electronic data processing apparatus comprising:

keyboard input means for entering lines of one or more alphameric characters each into said electronic data processing apparatus;

first memory means for storing lines of one or more alphameric characters each;

second memory means, coupled to said keyboard input means and first memory means, for temporarily storing each line of one or more alphameric characters being entered into said electronic data processing apparatus from said keyboard input means or recalled from said first memory means;

said keyboard input means including store control means for causing a line of one or more alphameric characters then stored in said second memory means to be stored in said first memory means and including recall control means for causing a designated line of one or more alphameric characters stored in said first memory means to be recalled to said second memory means;

first logic means, coupled to said keyboard input means, first memory means, and second memory means, for transferring a line of one or more alphameric characters then stored in said second memory means to said first memory means in response to actuation of said store control means and for transferring a designated line of one or more alphameric characters from said first memory means to said second memory means in response to actuation of said recall control means;

display means, coupled to said second memory means, for visually displaying a line of one or more alphameric characters then stored in said second memory means;

said display means including means for visually displaying a cursor for designating any character position of the displayed line of one or more alphameric characters;

said keyboard input means including cursor control means for controlling the position of said cursor; and

second logic means, coupled to said keyboard input means, second memory means, and display means, for positioning said cursor to designate any character position of the displayed line of one or more alphameric characters in response to actuation of said cursor control means.

2. Electronic data processing apparatus in claim 1 wherein said cursor control means comprises a single control key for moving said cursor to the left and a single control key for moving said cursor to the right.

3. Electronic data processing apparatus as in claim 1 wherein:

said keyboard input means includes a space bar; and

said second logic means is responsive to actuation of said space bar for introducing a blank character at one or more character positions in a line of one or more alphameric characters then stored or being stored in said second memory means.

4. Electronic data processing apparatus as in claim 1 wherein:

said keyboard input means includes insertion control means for controlling the insertion of one or more characters into a line of one or more alphameric characters; and

said second logic means is responsive to actuation of said insertion control means for inserting a blank character into a line of one or more alphameric characters then stored in said second memory means and displayed by said display means at the character position then designated by said cursor so that an alphameric character designated by actuation of an alphameric key of said keyboard input means may be inserted at the character position occupied by that blank character.

5. Electronic data processing apparatus as in claim 4 wherein said insertion control means comprises a single control key.

6. Electronic data processing apparatus as in claim 1 wherein:

said keyboard input means includes deletion control means for controlling the deletion of one or more characters from a line of one or more alphameric characters; and

said second logic means is responsive to actuation of said deletion control means for deleting a character from a line of one or more alphameric characters then stored in said second memory means and displayed by said display means at the character position then designated by said cursor.

7. Electronic data processing apparatus as in claim 6 wherein:

said deletion control means comprises a shift control key and one other control key; and

said second logic means is responsive to simultaneous actuation of those two keys for deleting a character from a line of one or more alphameric characters then stored in said second memory means and displayed by said display means at the character position then designated by said cursor.

8. Electronic data processing apparatus as in claim 1 wherein:

said keyboard input means includes display position control means for controlling the position of the displayed line of one or more alphameric characters; and

said second logic means is responsive to actuation of said display position control means for moving the displayed line of one or more alphameric characters either to the left or the right independently of said cursor.

9. Electronic data processing apparatus as in claim 8 wherein said display position control means comprises a single control key for moving the displayed line of one or more alphameric characters to the left, and a single control key for moving the displayed line of one or more alphameric characters to the right.

10. Electronic data processing apparatus as in claim 8 wherein said first logic means is responsive to actuation of said store control means for transferring a line of one or more alphameric characters then stored in said second memory means and displayed by said display means from said second memory means to said first memory means irrespective of the position of said cursor or of the position of the displayed line of one or more alphameric characters.

11. Electronic data processing apparatus as in claim 10 wherein:

said store control means comprises a single control key; and

said recall control means comprises a single control key actuated in sequence with one or more line number designating keys of the keyboard input means.

12. Electronic data processing apparatus as in claim 1 wherein said first logic means is responsive to actuation of said store control means for transferring a line of one or more alphameric characters then stored in said second memory means and displayed by said display means from said second memory means to said first memory means irrespective of the position of said cursor in the displayed line of one or more alphameric characters.

13. Electronic data processing apparatus as in claim 1 wherein:

said store control means comprises a single control key; and

said recall control means comprises a single control key actuated in sequence with one or more line number designating keys of the keyboard input means.

14. Electronic data processing apparatus comprising:

keyboard input means, including a plurality of numeric keys, for entering lines of one or more alphameric characters each into said electronic data processing apparatus;

first memory means for storing lines of one or more alphameric characters each;

second memory means, coupled to said keyboard input means and first memory means, for temporarily storing each line of one or more alphameric characters entered into said electronic data processing apparatus from said keyboard input means or recalled from said first memory means;

said keyboard input means including a store control key for causing the line of one or more alphameric characters then stored in said second memory means to be stored in said first memory means; and

logic means, coupled to said keyboard input means, first memory means, and second memory means, for transferring the line of one or more alphameric characters then stored in said second memory means to said first memory means in response to actuation of said store control key;

display means, coupled to said second memory means, for visually displaying the contents thereof;

said keyboard input means including a recall control key for recalling a designated line of one or more alphameric characters from said first memory means to said second memory means;

each line of one or more alphameric characters stored in said first memory means being associated with a separate line number;

said logic means is also operable for transferring a line of one or more alphameric characters from said first memory means to said second memory means in response to sequential actuation of said recall control key and one or more of said numeric keys designating the line number associated with the line of one or more alphameric characters to be transferred.

15. Electronic data processing apparatus as in claim 14 wherein:

said keyboard input means includes first and second memory control keys;

said logic means includes a line number counter for designating the line number associated with the line of one or more alphameric characters then stored in said second memory means; and

said logic means is responsive to actuation of said first memory control key or said second memory control key for incrementing or decrementing, respectively, said line number counter and for transferring the line of one or more alphameric characters associated with the line number then designated by said line number counter from said first memory to said second memory means.

16. Electronic data processing apparatus as in claim 15 wherein said logic means is responsive to successive actuation of said first memory control key or said second memory control key for successively incrementing or decrementing, respectively, said line number counter and for successively transferring the lines of one or more alphameric characters associated with the line numbers successively designated by said line number counter from said memory means to said second memory means.

17. Electronic data processing apparatus as in claim 14 wherein said first means stores each separate line number as part of the line of one or alphameric characters associated therewith.

18. Electronic data processing apparatus as in claim 17 wherein:

said logic means includes comparison means for comparing the line number designating the line of one or more alphameric characters to be transferred from said first memory means to said second memory means with the line numbers stored in said first memory means;

said logic means being responsive to a condition of equality indicated by said comparison means for transferring the designated line of one or more alphameric characters from said first memory means to said second memory means; and

said logic means being responsive to said comparison means in the event no condition of equality is detected for transferring, from said first memory means to said second memory means, the next higher numbered line above the designated line number.

19. Electronic data processing apparatus as in claim 14 wherein:

said keyboard input means includes first and second memory control keys;

said logic means includes a line number counter for storing the line number associated with a line of one or more alphameric characters stored in said first memory means that has been recalled to said second memory means; and

said logic means is responsive to actuation of said first memory control key or said second memory control key for incrementing or decrementing, respectively, said line number counter and for transferring the next higher numbered line or the next lower numbered line, respectively from said first memory means to said second memory means.

20. Electronic data processing apparatus comprising:

keyboard input means for entering lines of one or more alphameric characters each into said electronic data processing apparatus;

first memory means, coupled to said keyboard input means, for temporarily storing each line of one or more alphameric characters being entered into said electronic data processing apparatus from said keyboard input means;

display means, coupled to said first memory means, for visually displaying the contents thereof;

said keyboard input means including one or more control keys for terminating entry of each line of one or more alphameric characters into said electronic data processing apparatus and including a recall key for recalling the line of one or more alphameric characters most recently terminated by one of said control keys to said first memory means;

second memory means, coupled to said keyboard input means and first memory means, for temporarily storing a line of one or more alphameric characters; and

logic means, coupled to said keyboard input means, first memory means, and second memory means, for transferring the most recently terminated line of one or more alphameric characters then stored in said first memory means to said second memory means in response to termination of that line of one or more alphameric characters and for thereafter transferring the most recently terminated line of one or more alphameric characters then stored in said second memory means to said first memory means in response to actuation of said recall key.

21. An electronic calculator comprising:

keyboard input means for entering lines of one or more alphameric characters each into said electronic calculator;

first memory means for storing a program of one or more lines of one or more alphameric characters each;

second memory means, coupled to said keyboard input means and first memory means, for temporarily storing each line of one or more alphameric characters entered into said calculator from said keyboard input means or recalled from said first memory means;

said keyboard input means including store control means for causing a line of one or more alphameric characters then stored in said second memory means to be stored in said first memory means and including recall control means for causing a designated line of one or more alphameric characters stored in said first memory means to be recalled to said second memory means;

processing means, coupled to said keyboard input means, first memory means, and second memory means, for transferring a line of one or more alphameric characters then stored in said second memory means to said first memory means in response to actuation of said store control means, for transferring a designated line of one or more alphameric characters from said first memory means to said second memory means in response to actuation of said recall control means, and for executing said program to perform a selected calculation and storing the result of the selected calculation in said second memory means;

output display means, coupled to said second memory means, for visually displaying the contents thereof;

said keyboard input means including program halt control means for halting the execution of said program by said processing means, and program continue control means for resuming the execution of said program by said processing means; and

logic means, coupled to said keyboard input means, first memory means, second memory means, and processing means, for halting execution of said program in response to actuation of said program halt control means, for thereafter transferring a designated line of one or more alphameric characters of said program from said first memory means to said second memory means in response to actuation of said recall control means, and for thereafter resuming execution of said program, at the point where its execution was halted, in response to actuation of said program continue control means.

22. An electronic calculator as in claim 21 wherein:

said recall control means comprises a recall control key operable in sequence with one or more numeric keys for recalling a designated line of one or more alphameric characters of said program from said first memory means to said second memory means;

said program halt control means comprises a single control key; and

said program continue control means comprises a single control key.

23. Electronic data processing apparatus comprising:

keyboard input means for entering lines of one or more alphameric characters each into said electronic data processing apparatus;

memory means, coupled to said keyboard input means, for storing lines of one or more alphameric characters each entered into said electronic data processing apparatus, every one of said lines of one or more alphameric characters each stored in said memory means being associated with a separate line number;

output printing means, coupled to said keyboard input means and memory means, for printing lines of one or more alphameric characters each;

said keyboard input means including memory listing means for designating, by line number, any number of lines of one or more alphameric characters each then stored in said memory means to be printed and for initiating the printing of those designated lines of one or more alphameric characters each; and

logic means, coupled to said keyboard input means, memory means, and output printing means, for selectively causing said output printing means to print out the designated lines of one or more alphameric characters each in response to actuation of said memory listing means.

24. An electronic calculator as in claim 21 wherein:

said keyboard input means includes an execute control key for initiating execution of a line of one or more alphameric statements entered into the calculator from said keyboard input means; and

said logic means is responsive to entry of a line of one or more alphameric statements into the calculator and to actuation of said execute control key, during a period of time after which execution of a program has been halted by actuation of said program halt control means, for causing said processing means to execute that entered line of one or more alphameric statements, said logic means thereafter being responsive to actuation of said program continue control means for resuming execution of the program at the point where its execution was previously halted.

25. Electronic data processing apparatus as in claim 24 wherein:

said memory listing means comprises a list control key; and

said logic means is responsive to sequential actuation of said list control key and selected other keys of said keyboard input means designating a beginning line number and an ending line number for causing said output printing means to print out the lines of one or more alphameric characters each stored in said memory means having line numbers within the range defined by said beginning and ending line numbers, inclusive.

26. Electronic data processing apparatus as in claim 24 wherein:

said memory listing means comprises a list control key; and

said logic means is responsive to sequential actuation of said list control key and selected other keys of said keyboard input means designating a beginning line number for causing said output printing means to print out the lines of one or more alphameric characters each stored in said memory means commencing with the line associated with said beginning line number and including all lines associated with line numbers greater than said beginning line number.

27. Electronic data processing apparatus comprising:

keyboard input means, including a plurality of alphameric keys, for entering lines of one or more alphameric characters each into said electronic data processing apparatus;

memory means for storing lines of one or more alphameric characters each, every stored line of one or more alphameric characters being associated with a separate line number;

buffer storage means, coupled to said keyboard input means and memory means, for storing a line number and for storing an associated line of one or more alphameric characters entered into said electronic data processing apparatus;

display means, coupled to said buffer storage means, for visually displaying the contents thereof;

said keyboard input means including a control key for designating an automatic line numbering mode;

a line number counter for storing a current line number;

temporary storage means for storing a line number increment; and

logic means coupled to said keyboard input means and buffer storage means, said logic means being responsive to actuation of said control key, followed by actuation of one or more alphameric keys designating both a starting line number and a line number increment, for storing the starting line number in both said buffer storage means and said line number counter and for storing the line number increment in said temporary storage means, said logic means being further responsive to completion of each entry of a line of one or more alphameric characters into the electronic data processing apparatus for combining the contents of said line number counter and said temporary storage means and for storing the result in both said line number counter and said buffer storage means.

28. Electronic data processing apparatus as in claim 27 wherein:

said keyboard input means includes a delete key; and

said logic means is responsive to actuation of said delete key during entry of a line of one or more alphameric characters into the electronic data processing apparatus for deleting from said buffer storage means all of the characters previously entered as part of that line, while retaining the associated line number stored in said buffer storage means.

29. Electronic data processing apparatus as in claim 27 wherein said logic means is responsive to actuation of said control key, without further actuation of alphameric keys designating a starting line number and a line number increment, for storing a predetermined starting line number in both said buffer storage means and said line number counter and for storing a predetermined line number increment in said temporary storage means.

30. Electronic data processing apparatus as in claim 27 wherein said logic means is responsive to actuation of said control key, followed by actuation of one or more alphameric keys designating a starting line number, for storing that starting line number in both said buffer storage means and said line number counter and for storing a predetermined line number increment in said temporary storage means.

31. Electronic data processing apparatus comprising:

keyboard input means having a plurality of alphameric keys for entering lines of one or more alphameric characters each into said electronic data processing apparatus and having a plurality of user definable keys for entering an associated plurality of user-defined functions into said electronic data processing apparatus;

memory means, coupled to said keyboard input means, for storing a mainline program of one or more lines of one or more alphameric characters each entered into said electronic data processing apparatus and for storing said plurality of user-defined functions associated with said plurality of user-definable keys;

said keyboard input means including first, second, and third memory erase means for selectively initiating the erasure of said mainline program and/or said user-defined functions stored in said memory means; and

logic means, coupled to said keyboard input means and memory means, for erasing said mainline program in response to said first memory erase means, for erasing a selected one of said plurality of user-defined functions in response to said second memory erase means, and for erasing all of said plurality of user-defined functions in response to said third memory erase means.

32. Electronic data processing apparatus as in claim 31 wherein:

said keyboard input means includes a memory erase control key and an execute control key; and

said first memory erase means comprises sequential actuation of said memory erase control key and said execute control key.

33. Electronic data processing apparatus as in claim 31 wherein:

said keyboard input means includes a memory erase control key and an execute control key; and

said second memory erase means comprises sequential actuation of said memory erase control key, a selected one of said plurality of user definable keys, and said execute control key.

34. Electronic data processing apparatus as in claim 31 wherein:

said keyboard input means includes a memory erase control key and an execute control key; and

said third memory erase means comprises sequential actuation of said memory erase control key, one of said alphameric keys, and said execute control key.

35. An electronic calculator comprising:

keyboard input means having a plurality of alphameric keys for entering lines of one or more alphameric characters each into said calculator;

memory means, coupled to said keyboard input means, for storing a program of lines of one or more alphameric characters each entered into said calculator, every stored line being associated with a separate line number;

processing means, coupled to said keyboard input means and memory means, for executing the program stored in said memory means;

said keyboard input means including a halt execution key for conditioning the processing means to halt execution of the program immediately prior to the line thereof associated with a designated line number specified by one or more of said alphameric keys;

a program counter, coupled to said processing means, for storing the line number associated with the line currently being executed;

temporary storage means, coupled to said keyboard input means and memory means, for storing the designated line number; and

logic means, coupled to said keyboard input means, processing means, program counter, and temporary storage means, for storing the designated line number in said temporary storage means in response to actuation of said halt execution key, followed by actuation of said one or more alphameric keys, prior to commencing execution of the program stored in said memory means and for subsequently halting the execution of the program in response to the occurrence of a condition of equality between the contents of said program counter and said temporary storage means.

36. An electronic calculator as in claim 35 wherein:

said keyboard input means includes an execute control key for initiating execution of a line of one or more alphameric statements entered into the calculator from said keyboard input means;

said keyboard input means further including program continue control means for resuming execution of the program whose execution has been halted; and

said logic means is responsive to entry of a line of one or more alphameric statements into the calculator and to actuation of said execute control key, during a period of time after which execution of the program has been halted, for causing said processing means to execute that entered line of one or more alphameric statements, said logic means thereafter being responsive to actuation of said program continue control means for resuming execution of the program at the point where its execution was previously halted.

37. An electronic calculator comprising:

keyboard input means, including a plurality of alphameric keys, for entering lines of one or more alphameric characters each into said calculator, said keyboard input means further including a first program control key;

memory means, coupled to said keyboard input means, for storing a program of one or more lines of one or more alphameric characters each entered into said calculator from said keyboard input means;

line numbering means for associating every stored line with a separate line number;

processing means, coupled to said keyboard input means and memory means, for executing each line of the program stored in said memory means; and

logic means coupled to said keyboard input means and processing means, said logic means being responsive to actuation of said first program control key, in sequence with one or more of said alphameric keys designating the line number of any selected line of the program stored in said memory means, for initiating execution of the program at that selected line.

38. An electronic calculator as in claim 37 wherein:

said keyboard input means still further includes a second program control key;

said memory means stores variables forming part of the program stored in said memory means;

said logic means is further responsive to actuation of said first program control key, in sequence with said one or more alphameric keys, for setting all of the variables of the program stored in said memory means to an initial state prior to initiating execution of the program; and

said logic means is further responsive to actuation of said second program control key, followed by actuation of one or more of said alphameric keys designating the line number of any selected line of the program stored in said memory means, for initiating execution of the program at that line number without altering the variables stored in said memory means.

39. An electronic calculator comprising:

keyboard input means for entering lines of one or more alphameric characters each into the calculator, said keyboard input means including a line termination key for terminating entry of each line of one or more alphameric characters into the calculator and a print control key for designating a print-all mode of calculator operation;

memory means, coupled to said keyboard input means, for storing lines of one or more alphameric characters each entered into the calculator;

processing means, coupled to said keyboard input means and memory means, for executing lines of one or more alphameric characters each stored in said memory means;

output display means, coupled to said keyboard input means, memory means and processing means, for visually displaying lines of one or more alphameric characters each;

logic means, coupled to said keyboard input means, memory means, processing means, and display means, for initiating the display of lines of one or more alphameric characters entered into the calculator, alphameric error messages generated during execution of lines of one or more alphameric characters by said processing means, and executed display commands;

printing means for printing lines of one or more alphameric characters;

said logic means also being coupled to said printing means and being responsive to actuation of said print control key for initiating the printing of lines of one or more alphameric characters entered into the calculator and terminated by said line termination key, error messages generated during execution of lines of one or more alphameric characters by said processing means, and executed display commands.

40. An electronic calculator as in claim 39 wherein said logic means is responsive to two successive actuations of said print control key, after the print-all mode of calculator operation has been designated, for cancelling the previously designated print-all mode of calculator operation.

41. Electronic data processing apparatus comprising:

keyboard input means including a plurality of keys for entering operands into the electronic data processing apparatus;

first memory means, coupled to said keyboard input means, for temporarily storing operands being entered into the electronic data processing apparatus from said keyboard input means;

display means, coupled to said first memory means, for visually displaying the contents thereof;

said keyboard input means including one or more control keys for terminating entry of operands into the electronic data processing apparatus and including a recall key for recalling the operand most recently terminated by one of said control keys to said first memory means;

second memory means, coupled to said keyboard input means and first memory means, for temporarily storing an operand; and

logic means, coupled to said keyboard input means, first memory means, and second memory means, for transferring the most recently terminated operand then stored in said first memory means to said second memory means in response to termination of that operand and for thereafter transferring the most recently terminated operand then stored in said second memory means to said first memory means in response to actuation of said recall key.